Contents

Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions PDF

1 of 234
1 of 234

Summary of Content for Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions PDF

COMAND Operating Instructions

Order no. 6515 6912 13 Part no. 204 584 61 82 Edition B 2012

2045846182{ 2045846182

CO MA

ND Op

era tin

gI ns tru

cti on s

Publication details Internet

Further information on Mercedes-Benz vehicles and Daimler AG can be found on the Internet at the following websites: http://www.mercedes-benz.com http://www.daimler.com

Editorial office

You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have about the Operator's Manual to the technical documentation team at the following address: Daimler AG, HPC: R822, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, without written permission from Daimler AG.

Symbols $ Warning % Environmental note ! Possible damage to the vehicle + Tip X Instruction YY Continuation symbol (Y page) Page reference Display Display in the multifunction

display/COMAND Registered trademarks: RBluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG Inc. RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc. RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. RiPod and iTunes are registered trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.A. and in other countries. RLogic7 is a registered trademark of Harman International Industries, Incorporated. RMicrosoft is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and in other countries. RSIRIUS and associated brands are registered trademarks of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc. RHD Radio and associated brands are registered trademarks of the iBiquity Digital Corporation. RWindows media is a registered trademark of the Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and in other countries. RGracenote is a registered trademark of Gracenote, Inc. RZagatSurvey and associated brands are registered trademarks of Zagat.

As at 16.02.2011

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before you drive off, familiarize yourself with

your COMAND control panel and read this

manual. This will help you to obtain the

maximum use from your COMAND control

panel and to avoid endangering yourself and

others.

Depending on themodel and equipment level,

the functions and equipment of your

COMAND control panel may deviate from

certain descriptions and illustrations.

Mercedes-Benz is constantly updating its

systems to the state of the art and therefore

reserves the right to introduce changes in

design, equipment and technical features at

any time.

You cannot, therefore, base any claims on the

data, illustrations or descriptions in this

manual.

Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center

if you have further questions.

This manual is an integral part of the vehicle.

You should always keep it in the vehicle and

pass it on to the new owner if you sell the

vehicle.

The technical documentation team at

Daimler AG wishes you safe and pleasant

motoring.

2045846182 2045846182{

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 11

At a glance ........................................... 15

System settings .................................. 39

Navigation ........................................... 49

Telephone .......................................... 113

Audio .................................................. 143

Video .................................................. 185

Weather services .............................. 195

Rear Seat Entertainment System .... 207

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...

911 emergency call .......................... 115

A

Active partition (USB devices only)

Selecting ........................................ 163

Address book

Browsing ........................................ 136

Calling up ....................................... 136

Changing an entry .......................... 138

Connecting a call ........................... 139

Creating an entry ........................... 137

Deleting an entry ........................... 137

Details about an entry ................... 137

Importing contacts ........................ 141

Searching for an entry ................... 136

Starting route guidance ................. 139

Voice tag ....................................... 140

Address book entry

Adopting as a home address ............ 94

Showing the details ....................... 138

Address entry (example) .................... 54

Address entry menu ............................ 54

Alternative route ................................. 82

Area

Avoiding ......................................... 105

Audio AUX jack .................................. 182

Audio CD/DVD or MP3 mode

Switching to ................................... 157

Switching to (Rear Seat

Entertainment System) .................. 217

Audio DVD

Pause function ............................... 219

Stop function ................................. 159

Audio format

Setting (audio DVD mode) ............. 163

Autostore ........................................... 147

AUX jacks

CD/DVD drive ............................... 210

B

Back button ......................................... 19

Bird's-eye view .................................. 100

Bluetooth

Activating/deactivating ................... 45

External authorization .................... 118

General information ......................... 44

Interface ........................................ 115

Settings ........................................... 44

Telephony ...................................... 115

Bluetooth audio basic display ........ 176

Bluetooth audio device

Connecting .................................... 172

Reconnecting ................................. 174

Bluetooth audio mode

Switching on .................................. 175

Bluetooth device list ....................... 173

Bluetooth interface

Telephony ...................................... 114

Bluetooth interface telephony

Conditions ..................................... 115

Bluetooth telephone list ................. 116

Buttons on the COMAND

controller ............................................. 19

C

Call

Accepting .............................. 120, 121

Connecting .................................... 121

Rejecting ............................... 120, 121

Call lists ............................................. 129

Displaying details ........................... 130

Opening and selecting an entry ..... 129

Saving an entry in the address

book .............................................. 130

Storing an entry which has not yet

been stored ................................... 130

Car pool lanes ...................................... 53

Category

Satellite radio ................................ 150

Category list (music search) ............ 166

CD

Copy protection ............................. 165

Data medium ................................. 165

General information ....................... 165

Multisession .................................. 164

Playback options ........................... 163

Selecting a medium ....................... 159

Selecting a track ............................ 160

4 Index

CD/DVD

Ejecting (DVD drive) ....................... 155

Ejecting (Rear Seat Entertainment

System) ......................................... 217

Inserting (DVD changer) ................ 154

Inserting (Rear Seat

Entertainment System) .................. 216

Changing direction

Announcement phase ...................... 78

Change of direction phase ............... 78

Preparation phase ............................ 78

Channel presets ................................ 146

Character entry ................................... 28

Characters

Entering ........................................... 31

City

Entering ........................................... 55

Clear button ......................................... 19

COMAND

Basic functions ................................ 33

Components .................................... 16

Switching on/off .............................. 33

COMAND controller ............................. 18

COMAND control panel ....................... 17

COMAND display ................................. 20

Cleaning instructions ....................... 22

Setting ............................................. 40

Switching on/off .............................. 33

COMAND operating system ................ 16

Compass function ............................. 108

Connecting a USB device ................. 157

Copy protection (CD/DVD) ............... 165

Crosshair position

Saving .............................................. 99

D

Data carrier

MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 168

Data medium

Audio DVD ..................................... 164

CD/DVD ........................................ 165

MP3 ............................................... 164

Date format

Setting ............................................. 41

Deleting

Call lists ......................................... 131

Destination

Adopting from the list of previous

destinations ..................................... 96

Assigning a destination to an

address book entry .......................... 96

Destination entry ................................ 53

Address ........................................... 54

Destination memory ........................ 60

Intermediate stop ............................ 62

Last destination ............................... 61

Map ................................................. 61

Point of interest ............................... 66

Using geo-coordinates ..................... 62

Destination information ..................... 83

Destination memory ........................... 94

Deleting an entry ............................. 97

My address ...................................... 94

Storing a destination ........................ 95

Destinations

Search & Send ................................. 76

Digital map

Updating ........................................ 109

Displaying the track and album ....... 162

Distance

see Navigation, route overview

DTMF tones

Sending ......................................... 124

DVD

Copy protection ............................. 165

Data medium ................................. 165

Selecting a track ............................ 160

DVD menu .......................................... 190

DVD playback conditions ................. 187

DVD-Video

Picture settings .............................. 186

DVD-Video operation

Automatic picture shutoff .............. 186

Index 5

E

Entering characters

In navigation mode .......................... 28

In the address and the phone

book ................................................ 31

Using the number pad ..................... 29

Entry

Deleting ........................................... 30

Saving .............................................. 32

Selecting ........................................ 127

Example display

Audio CD mode .............................. 158

MUSIC REGISTER ........................... 169

Example of operation .......................... 27

F

Favorites button .................................. 45

Favorites buttons ................................ 19

First list entry

Accepting ......................................... 30

Freeway information ......................... 103

Frequency input

Manual ........................................... 146

Function restrictions

Telephone operation ...................... 115

Video DVD mode ........................... 187

G

Google Maps ...................................... 76

Gracenote Media Database .............. 161

H

Hands-free microphone

Switching on/off ........................... 123

Harman/kardon Logic 7

Surround Sound system ..................... 35

Home address ...................................... 94

Entering and saving ......................... 57

Selecting from the destination

memory ........................................... 60

I

Incident (traffic report) ....................... 88

Indicator lamp

Remote control .............................. 211

Individualization

Activating/deactivating ................... 44

Intermediate stop

Deleting ........................................... 64

Entering ........................................... 62

iPod

Alphabetical track selection .......... 181

Connecting to the Media

Interface ........................................ 178

Selecting a category/playlist ......... 180

iTunes ............................................... 181

L

Lane recommendations ...................... 79

Explanation ...................................... 80

Presentation .................................... 80

List as selection list

Calling up ......................................... 30

Load/eject button ............................. 154

Logic 7

see harman/kardon Logic 7

Surround Sound system

M

Map

Arrival time/distance to

destination ..................................... 102

Calling up ......................................... 61

City model ..................................... 103

Map settings .................................. 100

Moving ....................................... 61, 99

Showing geo-coordinates .............. 102

Showing road names ..................... 102

Showing the map data version ....... 108

Topographic map ........................... 103

Map information ................................ 102

Map orientation ................................. 100

Map scale

Adjusting ......................................... 98

Media Interface

Basic menu .................................... 179

Connection options ....................... 178

iPod ............................................. 178

Mode ............................................. 178

Notes for the MP3 player ............... 182

Selecting music files ...................... 180

6 Index

Switching to ................................... 179

USB mass storage device .............. 178

Media list ........................................... 159

Menu

Exiting .............................................. 36

Points of interest ............................. 66

Showing ........................................... 51

System settings ............................... 21

Menu item

Selecting .......................................... 27

Menu overview

COMAND ......................................... 21

Mobile phone

Authorizing .................................... 117

Connecting (Bluetooth interface) . 116

De-authorizing ............................... 119

External authorization .................... 118

Registering (authorizing) ................ 116

MP3

Bit/sampling rates ......................... 165

Copyright ....................................... 165

Data medium ................................. 164

File systems ................................... 164

Formats ......................................... 164

Selecting a medium ....................... 159

Multifunction display .......................... 23

Multifunction steering wheel ............. 22

Multisession CDs ............................... 164

Music files

Recording ...................................... 169

MUSIC REGISTER

Deleting all music files ................... 170

Disk space information .................. 170

Playback options ........................... 171

Switching to ................................... 168

Music search ..................................... 165

My address

see Home address

N

Navigation (also see route

guidance)

Traffic report .................................... 88

Navigation announcements

Switching off .............................. 33, 81

Navigation mode

Switching to ..................................... 51

North up orientation ......................... 100

O

Off-map ................................................ 87

Off-road ................................................ 87

Orientation in direction of travel ..... 100

P

Passcode

Entering ......................................... 117

Pause function ................................... 158

Personal point of interest

Selecting as the destination ............. 75

Personal points of interest

Displaying on the map ..................... 72

Managing categories ........................ 73

Saving .............................................. 74

Settings ........................................... 72

Visual information ............................ 73

Phone book

Adding a number to an address

book entry ..................................... 128

Calling up ....................................... 125

Creating a new entry ..................... 128

Deleting an entry ........................... 127

Icon overview ................................. 126

Phone book entry

Searching ...................................... 126

Playback options ............................... 163

Point of interest

Category .......................................... 68

Defining the position for the point

of interest search ............................. 67

Entering ........................................... 66

Entering using the map .................... 71

ZAGAT rating service ..................... 70

Point of interest icon

Setting ........................................... 101

Point of interest list ............................ 69

With character bar ........................... 71

Previous destinations ......................... 97

Index 7

R

Radio mode

Switching to ................................... 144

Radio station

Storing ........................................... 146

Read-aloud function ............................ 93

Read-aloud speed

Setting ............................................. 42

Real-time traffic reports ..................... 88

Rear-compartment screens .............. 209

Rear Seat Entertainment System

Adjusting sound settings ............... 214

Adjusting the brightness ................ 214

Adjusting the color ........................ 214

Adjusting the contrast ................... 214

AUX mode ...................................... 228

CD/DVD audio and MP3 mode ...... 216

Changing the batteries .................. 212

Changing the picture format .......... 215

Cordless headphones .................... 211

Multiple users ................................ 214

Operating with the headphones ..... 213

System settings ............................. 215

Using the main loudspeaker .......... 213

Video DVD mode ........................... 221

Recording the route

Viewing the route on the map .......... 86

Redial .................................................. 122

Remote control

Rear Seat Entertainment System ... 209

Reset .................................................... 47

Route

Calculating ....................................... 57

Estimated time of arrival .................. 83

Recording ........................................ 85

Route overview ................................ 84

Route calculation

Starting ............................................ 57

Route display ....................................... 84

Route guidance .................................... 77

Canceling ......................................... 81

Continuing ....................................... 81

Destination reached ......................... 81

Lane recommendations ................... 79

Off-road ........................................... 87

Traffic reports .................................. 88

Route options

Setting ............................................. 52

Route overview .................................... 84

Route type

Setting ............................................. 52

S

Safety notes

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ..... 154

Using the telephone ....................... 114

Video DVD mode ........................... 186

SatRadio ............................................. 148

Displaying information ................... 153

Registering .................................... 149

Selecting a category ...................... 150

Switching to ................................... 149

Screen

Selecting for remote operation ...... 210

SD memory card

Ejecting .......................................... 157

Inserting ........................................ 157

Search & Send ...................................... 76

SIRIUS weather display

5-day forecast ................................ 197

Daily forecast ................................. 197

Detail information .......................... 197

Information chart ........................... 196

Selecting the area for the weather

forecast ......................................... 197

Switching on/off ........................... 196

Weather map ................................. 200

Skipping back

CD/DVD mode .............................. 161

Skipping forwards

CD/DVD mode .............................. 161

SMS

Read aloud ..................................... 133

Sound

Switching on/off .............................. 33

Sound settings ..................................... 34

Speed dial list

Storing a phone book entry in the

speed dial list ................................ 131

State/province

Selecting .......................................... 54

8 Index

Station

Selecting ........................................ 146

Storing ........................................... 146

Station search ................................... 146

Storage options

Selecting .......................................... 96

Summer and standard time

Switching ......................................... 41

Surround sound ................................... 35

System language

Setting ............................................. 45

T

Telephone

Ending an active call ...................... 123

Entering phone numbers ................ 121

Incoming call ................................. 120

Making a call ................................. 123

Making a call via speed dial ........... 122

Outgoing call ................................. 121

Redialing ........................................ 122

Rejecting/accepting a waiting

call ................................................. 123

Sending DTMF tones ...................... 124

Single call ...................................... 122

Switching hands-free microphone

on/off ............................................ 123

Toggling ......................................... 124

Telephone basic menu

Bluetooth interface ...................... 119

Telephone number

Entering ......................................... 121

Text messages (SMS)

Calling the sender .......................... 134

Deleting ......................................... 135

Inbox .............................................. 133

Information and requirements ....... 133

Reading .......................................... 133

Storing sender in address book ..... 135

Time

Setting the time ............................... 41

Time format

Setting ............................................. 41

Time zone

Setting ............................................. 41

Tone settings

Balance and fader ............................ 34

Treble and bass ............................... 34

Track

Selecting ........................................ 218

Track information .............................. 220

Traffic jam function ............................. 82

Traffic Program

Switching off .................................... 33

Traffic report read-aloud function ..... 93

Treble and bass

Adjusting ......................................... 34

U

Using the telephone .......................... 120

V

V-Cards

Receiving ....................................... 142

Video DVD

Fast forward/rewind ...................... 189

Operation ....................................... 186

Pause function ............................... 189

Selecting ........................................ 190

Selecting a film/title ...................... 189

Selecting a scene/chapter ............ 189

Showing/hiding the control menu . 188

Stop function ................................. 189

Video DVD mode

Switching to ................................... 187

Voice Control System

Settings ........................................... 42

Volume

Adjusting ......................................... 33

Navigation announcements ............. 33

Phone calls ...................................... 34

W

Waveband

Switching (radio) ............................ 145

Waypoints

Accepting waypoints for the route ... 66

Editing .............................................. 65

Entering ........................................... 64

Index 9

Weather map (SIRIUS)

Calling up ....................................... 200

Legend ........................................... 204

Moving ........................................... 200

Showing/hiding layers ................... 201

Showing/hiding the menu ............. 200

Time stamp .................................... 205

Weather memory (SIRIUS)

Selecting an area ........................... 199

Storing an area .............................. 199

Z

ZAGAT rating service ........................ 70

10 Index

Operating safety

General notes

G WARNING

Any alterations of electronic components or

software can cause malfunctions.

Radio, satellite radio, amplifier, DVD changer,

navigation module, telephone and Voice

Control systems are interconnected.

Therefore, if one of the components is not

operational, or has not been removed/

replaced properly, the function of other

components could be impaired.

Such conditions might seriously impair the

operating safety of your vehicle.

We recommend having any service work on

electronic components carried out by an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNING

In order to avoid distraction which could lead

to an accident, the driver should enter system

settingswhile the vehicle is at a standstill, and

operate the system only when permitted by

road, weather and traffic conditions.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30mph

(approximately 50km/h), your car covers a

distance of 44feet (approximately 14m) every

second.

COMAND supplies you with information to

help you select your route more easily and

guide you conveniently and safely to your

destination. For safety reasons, we

encourage the driver to stop the vehicle in a

safe place before answering or placing a call,

or consulting the COMAND screen to read

navigational maps, instructions, or

downloaded information.

G WARNING

While the navigation system provides

directional assistance, the driver must remain

focused on safe driving behavior, especially

attention to traffic and street signs, and

should utilize the system's audio cues while

driving.

The navigation system does not supply any

information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic

regulations or traffic safety rules. Their

observance always remains in the driver's

personal responsibility. DVD maps do not

cover all areas nor all routes within an area.

i Canada only: This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to this

device could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

i USA only: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject

to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. this device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Any unauthorized modification to this

device could void the user's authority to

operate the equipment.

G WARNING

Change or modification not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user's authority to

operate this equipment.

! Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

ClassA digital device, pursuant to Part15

of the FCCRules. These limits are designed

to provide reasonable protection against

harmful interference when the equipment

is operated in a commercial environment.

This equipment generates, uses and can

Introduction 11

Z

radiate radio frequency energy and, if not

installed and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful

interference to radio communications.

G WARNING

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled

equipment and meets the FCC radio

frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in

Supplement C to OET65.

This equipment has very low levels of RF

energy that is deemed to comply without

maximum permissive exposure evaluation

(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be

installed and operated with at least 8 inches

(20cm) and more between the radiator and a

person's body (excluding extremities: hands,

wrists, feet and legs.)

Correct use

Observe the following informationwhen using

COMAND:

Rthe safety notes in this manual

Rall road traffic regulations

i Improper work on electronic components or other systems (such as radio, DVD

changer) and their software may result in

malfunction or failure. Even systems that

have not been modified could be affected

because the electronic systems are

connected. Electronic malfunctions can

seriously jeopardize the operational safety

of your vehicle.

i Roof antenna functionality (telephone, satellite radio, GPS) can be affected by the

use of roof carrier systems.

Retrofitting metalized plastic films to the

windows can affect radio reception and

lead to poorer reception of all other

antennas (e.g. emergency call antennas)

inside the vehicle.

i Only have repairs or changes to electronic components carried out at a qualified

specialist workshop which has the

necessary specialist knowledge and tools

to carry out the work required. Daimler

recommends that you use an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose. In

particular, work relevant to safety or on

safety-related systems must be carried out

at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Protection against theft: this device is equipped with technical provisions to

protect it against theft. Further information

on protection against theft can be obtained

from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Information on copyright

Macrovision

This product incorporates copyright

protection technology that is protected by

U.S. patents and other intellectual property

rights. Use of this copyright protection

technology must be authorized by Rovi

Corporation, and is intended for home and

other limited viewing uses only, unless

otherwise authorized by Rovi Corporation.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is

prohibited.

libjpeg

This software is based in part on the work of

the Independent JPEG Group.

Free Type

Portions of this software are copyright2005

The FreeType Project http://

www.freetype.org.

All rights reserved.

NetFront

This product contains NetFront Browser

software of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright

1996-2010 ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights

reserved.

12 Introduction

The NetFront Browser software is based in

part on the work of the Independent JPEG

Group.

Camellia

Copyright 2006, 2007 NTT (Nippon

Telegraph and Telephone Corporation).

All rights reserved.

The conditions and disclaimers in connection

with use of Camellia are available at http://

info.isl.ntt.co.jp/crypt/eng/index.html.

Flash Lite

This product contains Flash Lite

technology by Adobe Systems Incorporated.

This product contains Adobe Flash player

software under license from Adobe Systems

Incorporated, Copyright 1995-2010 Adobe

Macromedia Software LLC. All rights

reserved. Adobe and Flash are registered

trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated

in the United States and/or other countries.

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described. This includes safety-

related systems and functions. Therefore, the

equipment on your COMAND system may

differ from that in the descriptions and

illustrations. The original purchase

agreement lists all systems installed in your

vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center if you have any questions about

equipment or operation.

Function restrictions

For safety reasons, some COMAND functions

are restricted or unavailable while the vehicle

is in motion. You will notice this, for example,

because you will either not be able to select

certain menu items or because COMAND will

display a message to this effect.

Introduction 13

Z

14

COMAND operating system ............... 16

Multifunction steering wheel ............. 22

Operating COMAND ............................ 26

Basic functions of COMAND ............... 33

Climate control status display ........... 36

Rear view camera ............................... 37

15

A t a g la n c e

COMAND operating system

Overview

Example

Function Page

: COMAND display 20

; COMAND control panel

with DVD changer 17

= COMAND controller 18

Back button (left) 19

Clear button (right) 19

Favorites button (left) 19

Favorites button (right) 19

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, up to two favorites buttons may be available

in the M-Class.

Components of COMAND

COMAND consists of:

Rthe COMAND display

Rthe COMAND control panel with DVD

changer

Rthe COMAND controller

Rthe back and clear buttons

Rdepending on the vehicle equipment, up to

two favorites buttons (e.g. M-Class)

You can use COMAND to operate the

following main functions:

Rthe navigation system

Rthe audio function with radio and satellite

radiomodes, disc (CD/audio DVD andMP3

mode), memory card (MP3 mode), MUSIC

REGISTER, USB storage device, Media

Interface, Bluetooth audio and audio AUX

Rthe telephone with text message function

and the address book

Rthe video function with video DVD and

video AUX modes

Rthe weather service SIRIUS Weather

Rthe system settings

You can call up the main functions:

Rusing the corresponding function buttons

Rusing themain function bar in the COMAND

display (Y page 20)

i You can transfer an audio or video source selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat

Entertainment System.

16 COMAND operating system A t a g la n c e

COMAND control panel

Function Page

: Switches to radio mode 144

Switches wavebands 145

Switches to satellite radio 149

; Switches to navigation

mode 51

Shows the menu system 51

= Pressh repeatedly

Switches to audio CD,

audio DVD and MP3 mode

or DVD video mode 157

Switches to memory card

mode 157

Switches to MUSIC

REGISTER 168

Switches to USB storage

device mode 157

Switches to Media

Interface or audio AUX

mode 179

Switches to Bluetooth

audio mode 175

Function Page

? Calls up the telephone

basic menu:

Bluetooth interface

telephony 119

A V Load/eject button 154

B Selects a station using the

station search function 146

Rewind 161

Selects the previous track 160

C Disc slot

Loads CDs/DVDs 154

Ejects CDs/DVDs 155

Updates the digital map 109

D Selects a station using the

station search function 146

Fast forwards 161

Selects the next track 160

E Clear button

Deletes characters 30

Deletes an entry 30

COMAND operating system 17

A t a g la n c e

Function Page

F Number pad

Selects stations via the

station presets 146

Stores stations manually 146

Mobile phone

authorization 117

Telephone number entry 121

Sends DTMF tones 124

Character entry 28

Selects a location for the

weather forecast from the

memory 199

z Displays the current

track being played 162

g Selects stations by

entering the frequency

manually 146

g Selects a track 160

G Switches COMAND on/off 33

Adjusts the volume 33

Function Page

H SD memory card slot 157

I Calls up the system menu 27

J Accepts a call 121

Dials a number 121

Redials 122

Accepts a waiting call 123

K Mute 33

Switches the hands-free

microphone on/off 123

Cancels the text message

read-aloud function 133

Switches off navigation

announcements 33

L Rejects a call 121

Ends an active call 123

Rejects a waiting call 123

COMAND controller

Example: M-Class

: COMAND controller

You can use the COMAND controller to select

the menu items in the COMAND display.

You can call up menus or lists, scroll through

menus or lists and exit menus or lists.

Operating the COMAND controller (example)

The COMAND controller can be:

Rpressed briefly or pressed and heldW

Rturned clockwise or counter-clockwise cVd

Rslid left or right XVY

Rslid forwards or back ZV

Rslid diagonally aVb

18 COMAND operating system A t a g la n c e

In the instructions, operating sequences are

described as follows:

X Press the$ button.

Radio mode is activated.

X Select Radio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Confirm Station List by pressingW. The station list appears.

Buttons on the COMAND controller

Overview

Example: M-Class

: Back button

; Clear button

= Favorites button (if available)

? Favorites button

i Depending on the vehicle equipment, up to two favorites buttons may be available

in the M-Class.

Back button

You can exit a menu or call up the basic

display of the current operating mode using

this button.

X To exit the menu: press back button:

briefly.

COMAND changes to the next higher menu

level in the current operating mode.

i You can also exit a menu by sliding XVY or ZV the COMAND controller.

X To call up the basic display: press and

hold back button:.

COMAND changes to the basic display of

the current operating mode.

Clear button

You can delete individual characters or an

entire entry during character entry using this

button.

X To delete individual characters: briefly

press clear button;.

X To delete an entire entry: press and hold

clear button;.

Favorites buttons

Depending on the vehicle equipment, up to

two favorites buttons may be available in the

M-Class.

You can assign predefined functions to

favorites buttons= and? and call them up

by pressing the button (Y page 45).

COMAND operating system 19

A t a g la n c e

COMAND display

Display overview

The COMAND display shows the function currently selected and its associated menus. The

COMAND display is divided into several areas.

The radio display is shown in the example.

: Status bar

; To call up the audio menu

= Main function bar

? Display/selection window

A Radio menu bar

Status bar: shows the time and the current settings for telephone operation.

Themain functions navigation, audio, telephone and video feature additional menus. These

are indicated by triangle;. The following table lists the available menu items.

Main function bar= allows you to call up the desired main function.

In the example, the audio main function is set to radio mode and display/selection

window? is active.

Radio menu barA allows you to operate the radio functions.

20 COMAND operating system A t a g la n c e

Menu overview

Navi Audio Telephon

e

Video System Symbol

Route settings FM/AM radio

(using HD

Radio)

Telephone Video DVD Calling up

the system

menu

Calling up

the

weather

service

SIRIUS

Weather

Map settings Satellite radio Address

book

AUX

Personal points

of interest

Disc

O Activating/ deactivating road

name

announcement

Memory card

O Audio fadeout on/off

MUSIC

REGISTER

O Activating/ deactivating the

alternative

routes function

Bluetooth

audio

Avoiding an area Media

Interface

SIRIUS service Rear

Map version AUX

System menu overview

Settings Time Consumption Display off

Display settings Setting the time Calling up the fuel

consumption

display

Switching off

the display

Text reader speed Setting the format

Language Setting the time

zone

Voice-operated control

settings

COMAND operating system 21

A t a g la n c e

Settings Time Consumption Display off

Rear view camera

Activating/deactivating

Bluetooth

Resetting COMAND

i Delete your personal data using this function, for

example before selling your

vehicle.

If equipped with the rear view camera: if the function is activated and COMAND is

switched on, the image from the rear view camera is automatically shown in the COMAND

display when reverse gear is engaged.

Cleaning instructions

! Do not touch the COMAND display. The display has a very sensitive high-gloss

surface; there is a risk of scratching. If you

have to clean the screen, however, use a

mild cleaning agent and a soft, lint-free

cloth.

The display must be switched off and cooled

down before you start cleaning. Clean the

display screen, when necessary, with a

commercially available microfiber cloth and

cleaning agent for TFT/LCD displays. Do not

apply pressure to the display surface when

cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible

damage. Then, dry the surface with a dry

microfiber cloth.

Avoid using alcoholic thinners, gasoline or

abrasive cleaning agents. These could

damage the display surface.

Multifunction steering wheel

Example: SLK

Function Page

: Multifunction display (see

the vehicle Operator's

Manual)

; ?

Activates voice control (see

the separate operating

instructions)

22 Multifunction steering wheel A t a g la n c e

Function Page

= ~

Rejects or ends a call 120

6

Makes or accepts a call 121

Switches to the redial

memory 122

WX

Adjusts the volume 33

8

Mutes 33

? =;

Selects a menu 122

9:

Selects a submenu or

scrolls through lists 122

a

Confirms selections and

fades out messages 122

A %

Back or switches off voice

control (see the separate

operating instructions)

Operating the multifunction display

G WARNING

A driver's attention to the road must always

be his/her primary focus when driving. For

your safety and the safety of others, we

recommend that you pull over to a safe

location and stop before placing or taking a

telephone call. If you choose to use the

telephonewhile driving, please use the hands-

free device and only use the telephone when

weather, road and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h ), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately

14 m) every second.

X To select a menu: press the= or; button.

X To select a submenu or scroll through

the list: press the9 or: button.

X To select the next menu up: press the

% button.

X To call up standard displays: repeatedly

press the% button until the total

distance recorder and the trip meter

appear in the display.

or

X Press and hold the% button until the

total distance recorder and the trip meter

appear in the display.

X To confirm your selection: press the

a button.

X To confirm the message: press the

a or% button.

Menus and submenus

The number of menus depends on the vehicle

equipment.

Menu Functions and submenus

Navigation Navigation system displays

Audio Selects a station

Operates the DVD changer,

SD memory card, MUSIC

REGISTER, USB device,

Bluetooth audio and Media

Interface

Operates video DVD

Telephone Accepts/rejects a call

Makes/ends a call

Selects a phone book entry

Redials

Multifunction steering wheel 23

A t a g la n c e

Z

Navigation system menu

Route guidance inactive

The display shows the road on which the

vehicle is currently traveling, provided the

digital map contains it.

Route guidance active

The display shows:

Rthe distance to the destination

Rthe distance to the next change of direction

Rcurrent street

Rthe travel direction arrow

If a change of direction is imminent, the

display shows, for example, the following

information.

The route guidance display with the change of direction (example)

: Road to which the change of direction

leads

; Distance to the change of direction and

distance graphic

= Lane recommendation

? Change of direction icon

On multilane roads, the system can display

lane recommendation= for the next change

of direction. During the change of direction,

additional lanes may be displayed.

Audio menu

Adjusting the volume

X Press theW orX button.

Setting the station/channel

X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).

X Switch on FM / AM Radio (Y page 144) or

Sat Radio (Y page 149).

X In the multifunction display, select the

audio menu with the= or; button.

X To select the next/previous station/

channel from the memory: briefly press

the: or9 button.

X To select the next/previous station/

channel: press and hold the: or

9 button.

Operating the DVD changer/memory

card/USB device/MUSIC REGISTER/

Bluetooth audio/Media Interface

X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).

X Switch on Disc, Memory Card

(Y page 157), Music

Register(Y page 168), Bluetooth audio

(Y page 172) or Media Int.

(Y page 179).

X In the multifunction display, select the

audio menu with the= or; button.

X To select the next/previous track:

briefly press the: or9 button.

X To search for the next/previous track:

press and hold the: or9 button.

i When you play a CD/DVD with track information, the track name and number

are shown in the multifunction display. The

track name is displayed when an MP3 CD

is being played.

24 Multifunction steering wheel A t a g la n c e

Operating video DVD

X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).

X Switch on DVD-Video (Y page 187).

X In the multifunction display, select the

audio menu with the= or; button.

X To select the next/previous scene:

briefly press the: or9 button.

Telephone menu

G WARNING

A driver's attention to the road must always

be his/her primary focus when driving. For

your safety and the safety of others, we

recommend that you pull over to a safe

location and stop before placing or taking a

telephone call. If you choose to use themobile

phone while driving, please use the handsfree

device and only use the mobile phone when

weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a cellular mobile phone while driving a

vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately

14 m) every second.

Operating the telephone

X Switch on COMAND (Y page 33).

X Call up the telephone basic menu

(Y page 119).

If the telephone has not yet been authorized,

the Bluetooth Ready message appears in

the multifunction display.

If the telephone is switched on and

authorized, the Phone Ready message

appears in the multifunction display.

Accepting a call

X Press the6 button.

Multifunction display (example)

The display shows the phone number or the

nameandphone number (if the entry is stored

in the address book) or shows the Unknown

(phone number withheld) message.

i You can also accept the call by voice command using the Voice Control System

(see the separate operating instructions).

Rejecting or ending a call

X Press the~ button.

Calling a number from the phone book

X Use= or; to select the Phone

menu.

X Press:,9 or9 to switch to the phone book.

X Press: or9 to select the name you

want.

i The saved names are displayed alphabetically.

i If you hold down the: or9 button

for longer than one second, rapid scroll

begins. Themultifunction display goes from

the seventh entry displayed to the first

entry under the following letter. Release

the button to stop.

X To connect a call: press6 or9 on the multifunction steering wheel.

The Connecting call... message

appears in the multifunction display along

with the number being dialed and the

name, if it is stored in the phone book.

Multifunction steering wheel 25

A t a g la n c e

Z

The number dialed is stored in the

corresponding call list.

i If there are several numbers for this name, you see a list of sub-entries.

X Press: or9 to select the

phone number you want.

X Press the6 or9 button again to place the call.

Redialing

COMAND saves the last phone numbers or

names dialed.

X Press the=; buttons to select the

Phone menu.

X Press the; button to open the list of

dialed numbers.

X Press the:9 buttons to select the

desired name or phone number.

X To connect a call: press6 or9 on the multifunction steering wheel.

Operating COMAND

Selecting a main function

Initial situation

You would like to switch from navigation

mode (address entry menu) to the system

settings, for example.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm.

The address entry menu appears.

Address entry menu

: Main function bar

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller and switch to main function bar:.

X Select System in the main function bar by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The system menu appears.

Calling up themenuof amain function

If one of the main functions navigation, audio,

telephone or video is switched on,

triangle: appears next to the entry in the

main function bar. You can now select an

associated menu.

The example describes how to call up the

audio menu from audio CD mode (an audio

CD is playing).

26 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e

: To call up the audio menu

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Audio menu appears.

Audio menu

The# dot indicates the current audio mode.

X Select another audio mode, e.g. Radio, by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Radio mode is activated.

Selecting a menu item

The example describes how to select a station

from the station presets in radio mode.

X Press the$ function button.

X Select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The station preset memory appears.

X Select the station by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The station is set.

Example of operation

Initial situation

You would like to switch from the system

function to radio mode and set a station, for

example.

The operating example describes how to:

Rcall up the current audio function

Rswitch on radio mode

Rset a station

X To call up the system menu: press the

W button.

System menu

Operating COMAND 27

A t a g la n c e

Z

Calling up the current audio function

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The basic display of the current audio

function, e.g. audio CD mode, appears.

: To call up the audio menu

Switching to radio mode

Option 1

X Press the$ function button.

The radio display appears.

i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches between the FM, AM and WB

wavebands in that order and then calls up

SatRadio mode. Pressing the button again

takes you back to FM radio mode.

Option 2

X Select Audio again by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The Audio menu appears. Radio is

highlighted.

X PressW the COMAND controller and

confirm Radio.

The radio basic display appears with the

waveband last selected.

X To set a station: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/

selection window is active.

Entering characters in navigation

mode (entering a city)

General information

Character entry is explained in the following

sections using NEW YORK as an example for

entering a city.

If you want to use the address entry menu

(Y page 54) to enter a city, a street or a

house number, for example, COMAND

provides either a list with a character bar

(option 1) or a selection list (option 2).

You can enter the characters using either the

character bar or the number keypad. In the

28 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e

selection list, you select an entry to copy it to

the address entry menu.

Option 1: city list/street list with

character bar

X Call up the city list with character bar

(Y page 55).

The alphabetically sorted city list shows the

first available entries.

Entering characters using the character

bar

X Select N by turning COMAND controller

cVd and pressW to confirm.

: N character entered by user

; ANTICOKE characters automatically

added by COMAND

= List entry that most closely resembles the

current entry by the user

? To switch to the selection list

A To delete an entry

B Characters not currently available

C Characters currently available

D Currently selected character

E Character bar

F To cancel an entry

G List

ListG shows all available city names

beginning with N. The list entry most closely

resembling user's current entry= is always

highlighted at the top of the list (NANTICOKE

in the example).

All characters that have been entered are

displayed in black, the letter N in

example:. The letters that are added

automatically by COMAND are displayed in

gray;, ANTICOKE in the example.

Character barE shows the letters still

available for selection in blackC. These can

be selected; in the example, the letter O is

highlightedD. Which characters remain

available depends on the characters already

entered by the user and on the data stored on

the digital map. Characters that are no longer

available are shown in grayB.

X Select E, W, space, Y in order and confirm

each withW.

Entering characters using the number

keypad

X Press number keyp twice in quick

succession to select the letter N.

The character appears at the bottom of the

display when the key is pressed. The first

available letter is highlighted.

You see which characters you can enter with

that key. Each time the key is pressed, the

next character is selected.

Example: keyp:

Rpress once = M

Rpress twice = N

Rpress three times = O

X Wait until the character display goes out.

The entries matching your input are shown

in the list.

Operating COMAND 29

A t a g la n c e

Z

X Enter E, W, space, Y with the corresponding

keys.

i The space is entered using number key 9.

Further functions in the list with

character bar

X To delete characters: select2 by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the2 button next to the

COMAND controller.

X To delete an entry: select the2 icon

by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller, and then pressW and hold until the entire entry is deleted.

or

X Press and hold the2 button next to the

COMAND controller until the entire entry is

deleted.

X To cancel an entry: select the& icon in

the bottom left of the character bar and

pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the% back button.

The address entry menu appears.

X Toaccept the first list entry:pressW and hold the COMAND controller until the

address entry menu appears.

The accepted list entry is shown there.

Calling up the list as a selection list

Select the desired city from the selection list.

If there are several entries for a city or if

several cities of the same name are stored,

then is highlighted in the character bar.

X PressW the COMAND controller.

It is also possible to switch the city list to the

selection list at any time during character

input.

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the city list appears as a

selection list.

or

X Select in the character bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Option 2: city list as selection list

COMAND either shows the selection list

automatically or you can call up the selection

list from the list with character bar.

The example shows the selection list after the

city NEW YORK has been entered. The entry is

highlighted automatically.

X Confirm NEW YORK by pressingW the COMAND controller.

The address entry menu appears. You can

now enter a street, for example.

30 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e

i You will find further information in the "Destination entry" section (Y page 53).

Entering characters in the address

book and in the phone book

Introduction

The following section describes how to enter

characters in the phone book (Y page 125)

and in the address book (Y page 137) when

creating a new entry.

Creating a new entry in the phone book

X Call up the input menu with data fields

(Y page 128).

Phone book: input menu with data fields

Creating a new entry in the address

book

X Call up the input menu with data fields

(Y page 137).

Input menu with data fields

: Selected data field with cursor

; Character bar

Entering characters

The example describes how to enter the

surname Schulz.

X Select S by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

S is entered into the data field. All

characters are shown in black and can

always be selected in the character bar.

The character bar offers characters

corresponding to the respective data field

(letters or digits).

: To switch the character bar to

uppercase/lowercase letters

; To switch the character bar from

uppercase/lowercase letters to digits

= To change the language of the character

bar

? To delete a character/an entry

Operating COMAND 31

A t a g la n c e

Z

X Select c and confirm by pressingW the COMAND controller.

The letter c is added to S in the data field.

X Repeat the process until the name has

been entered in full.

X To enter a phone number: select the

digits one by one in the corresponding data

field by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Switching data fields

If youwant to enter a first name after you have

entered a surname, for example, proceed as

follows to switch between the data fields:

Option 1

X Select the4 or5 icon in the character bar and pressW to confirm. The input menu shows the data field

selected.

: Cursor in the next data field

; To store an entry

= 4 and5 icons to select a data field

Option 2

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the character bar

disappears.

X Select the data field by sliding ZV and pressW to confirm.

Storing an entry

X Select in the character bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The entry is stored in the address book.

Further functions available in the

character bar

X To switch the character bar to

uppercase/lowercase characters:

select* orE and pressW to confirm.

X To switch the character set: select

p and pressW to confirm. The character set switches between

uppercase/lowercase letters and digits.

X To change the language of the

character bar: selectB and pressW to confirm.

X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To reposition the cursorwithin the data

field: select the2 or3 icon and press W to confirm.

: Cursor (repositioned)

; 2 and3 icon to reposition the cursor

X Delete the character/entry (Y page 30).

32 Operating COMAND A t a g la n c e

Basic functions of COMAND

Switching COMAND on/off

X Press theq control knob. A warning message appears. COMAND

calls up the previously selected menu.

i If you switch off COMAND, playback of the current audio or video source will also

be switched off.

Switching the COMAND display on/

off

X Press theW function button.

or

X Select System in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. In both cases, the system menu appears.

X To switch off: select Display Off and

pressW to confirm.

X To switch on: press one of the function

buttons, e.g.W, or the% back

button.

Mute

Sound from an audio/video source

X Press the8 button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

The sound from the respective audio or

video source is switched on or muted.

i When the sound is off, the system displays the, icon in the status line.

When you change the audio or video

source, or adjust the volume, sound

automatically switches on again.

i Even if the sound is switched off, you will still hear navigation system

announcements.

Switching off all navigation

announcements

X Navigation announcements: press the

8 button during the announcement.

Switching navigation announcements

back on

X Press8 again.

i The navigation announcements are switched on again if you start a new route

guidance or if COMAND is switched off and

on with theq control knob.

Adjusting the volume

Adjusting the volume for the audio or

video source

X Turn theq control knob.

or

X Press theW orX button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

The volume of the currently selected audio

or video source changes.

You can also adjust the volume for the

following:

Rnavigation announcements

Rphone calls

Rvoice output of the Voice Control System

(see the separate operating instructions)

Adjusting the volume for navigation

announcements

During a navigation announcement:

X Turnq the control knob.

or

X Press theW orX button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

Basic functions of COMAND 33

A t a g la n c e

Z

Adjusting the volume for phone calls

You can adjust the volume for hands-free

mode during a telephone call.

X Turn theq control knob.

or

X Press theW orX button on the

multifunction steering wheel.

Adjusting the sound settings

Calling up the sound menu

You can make various sound settings for the

different audio and video sources. Thismeans

that it is possible to set more bass for radio

mode than for audio CD mode, for example.

You can call up the respective sound menu

from the menu of the desired mode.

The example describes how to call up the

sound menu in radio mode.

X Press the$ function button.

The radio display appears. You will hear the

last station played on the last waveband.

X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now set the treble and bass or the

balance and fader for radio mode.

Adjusting treble and bass

X Select Treble or Bass in the sound menu

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

Adjusting the bass (example)

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The setting is stored and you exit themenu.

Adjusting balance and fader

With the balance function, you can control

whether the sound is louder on the driver's or

front-passenger side.

The fade function is used to control whether

the sound is louder in the front or the rear of

the vehicle.

X Select Balance or Bal./Fad. (balance/

fader) in the sound menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Example: balance and fader settings

34 Basic functions of COMAND A t a g la n c e

X Select a balance setting by sliding XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select a fader setting by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The setting is stored and you exit themenu.

Surround sound

General information

If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/

kardon Logic7 surround sound system,

you can set the optimum surround sound in

the vehicle interior.

The harman/kardonLogic7 surround

sound system is available for the following

operating modes:

Rradio (FM only)

Rsatellite radio

Raudio CD

Raudio DVD (MLP, dts, PCM and Dolby

Digital audio formats)

RMP3 (including SD memory card and USB

storage device)

RMedia Interface

RBluetooth audio mode

Rvideo DVD (PCM, dts and Dolby Digital

audio formats)

RAUX

Because some DVDs contain both stereo and

multichannel audio formats, it may be

necessary to set the audio format

(Y page 163).

i The Logic7 On function creates a surround sound experience for every

passenger when playing, for example,

stereo recordings. It enables optimum

playback of music and films on CD, audio

DVD or video DVD with multichannel audio

formats, such as MLP, dts or Dolby Digital.

This results in sound characteristics like

those intended by the sound engineer

when the original was recorded.

i If you select Logic7 Off, all permissible formats are played as stored on the

medium. Due to the design of the

passenger compartment, an optimum

audio experience cannot be guaranteed for

all passengers.

i Discs which support the audio formats mentioned have the following logos:

Dolby Digital

dts

MLP

Switching surround sound on/off

The example describes how to set the

surround sound for radio mode.

X Press the$ function button.

The radio display appears. You will hear the

last station played on the last waveband.

Basic functions of COMAND 35

A t a g la n c e

Z

X Select Sound by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select surround and pressW to confirm.

Setting surround sound (example)

X Select Logic7 On or Logic7 Off by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Depending on your selection, surround

sound is switched on or off and the menu

is exited.

X To exit the menu without saving: press

the% back button or slide XVY the COMAND controller.

i Please note the following: for the optimum audio experience for all

passengers when Logic7 is switched on,

the balance and fader settings should be

set to the center of the vehicle interior.

You will achieve the best sound results by

playing high-quality audio and video DVDs.

MP3 tracks should have a bit rate of at least

128 kbit/s.

Surround-sound playback does not

function for mono signal sources, such as

AM radio mode.

If radio reception is poor, e.g. in a tunnel,

you should switch off Logic7, as it may

otherwise switch between stereo and

mono and cause temporary sound

distortions.

On some stereo recordings, the sound

characteristics may differ from

conventional stereo playback.

Climate control status display

If you change the settings of the climate

control system (see the vehicle Operator's

Manual), the climate status display appears

for three seconds at the bottom of the screen

in the COMAND display. It displays the

current settings of the various climate control

functions.

The climate status display appears when:

X Turn one of the two temperature controls

and set the temperature for the left or

right1, 2 or turn the temperature control and

set the temperature3, 4.

or

X Turn the control to set the airflow3, 4.

or

X You press one of the following buttons:

K Increases air flow1, 2

I Decreases air flow1, 2

Switches climate control on/off1, 2, 3

Switches the ZONE function on/

off1, 2

1 Available for 2-zone automatic climate control.

2 Available for 3-zone automatic climate control.

3 Available for the air-conditioning system.

4 Available for Heatmatic.

36 Climate control status display A t a g la n c e

Controls the climate control

automatically1, 2

Sets the climate control style to

automatic mode (FOCUS/MEDIUM/

DIFFUSE)2

_ Sets the air distribution1, 2

M,P orO Sets the air

distribution3, 4.

Activates the defrost function1, 2, 3, 4

Switches on maximum cooling

i The climate status display does not appear when the image from the rear view

camera is displayed.

The climate status display in the COMAND display (example)

The illustration shows an example of the

current settings for:

Rthe defroster function (top)

Rclimate mode in automatic mode (center)

Rmaximum cooling (bottom)

X To hide the display: turn or press the

COMAND controller.

or

X Press one of the buttons on the COMAND

operating system.

i A detailed description of the climate control is available in the vehicle

Operator's Manual.

Rear view camera

G WARNING

The rear view camera is merely an aid.

Please observe the corresponding notes in

your vehicle's Operator's Manual.

The image from the rear view camera is

shown in the COMAND display when reverse

gear is engaged, if:

Ryour vehicle is equipped with a rear view

camera.

RCOMAND is activated.

Rthe Activation by R gear function is

activated.

If the function is activated, the COMAND

display will automatically switch back to the

previously selected display as soon as you

shift out of reverse gear.

i Further information on the rear view camera driving system can be found in the

vehicle Operator's Manual.

X Press theW function button.

The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rear View Camera and pressW to confirm.

1 Available for 2-zone automatic climate control.

2 Available for 3-zone automatic climate control.

3 Available for the air-conditioning system.

4 Available for Heatmatic.

Rear view camera 37

A t a g la n c e

Z

X Select Activation by R gear and press

W to confirm. The function is switched onO or off, depending on the previous status.

i If a side view camera is available, using COMANDyou can switch from the rear view

camera picture to the side view camera

picture, see the "System settings" section.

38 Rear view camera A t a g la n c e

COMAND features ............................... 40

Display settings .................................. 40

Time settings ....................................... 40

Fuel consumption display .................. 41

ON&OFFROAD display ......................... 42

Text reader settings ............................ 42

Voice Control System settings .......... 42

Bluetooth settings ............................ 44

Setting the system language ............. 45

Assigning the favorites button .......... 45

Importing/exporting data .................. 46

Reset function ..................................... 47

39

S y s t e m s e t t in g s

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

Display settings

Setting the brightness

The brightness detected by the display light

sensor affects the setting options for this

function.

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display and pressW to confirm.

X Select Brightness and pressW to confirm.

X Adjust the brightness by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Display design

Your COMAND display features optimized

designs for operation during the day and at

night. You can set the design by manually

selecting day or night design or opt for an

automatic setting.

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display and pressW to confirm.

X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or

Automatic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set

permanently to day

design.

Night Mode The display is set

permanently to night

design.

Automatic In the Automatic

setting, COMAND

evaluates the readings

from the automatic

vehicle light sensor and

switches between the

display designs

automatically.

Time settings

General information

If COMAND is equipped with a navigation

system and has GPS reception, COMAND

automatically sets the time and date. You can

also adjust the time yourself in 30-minute

increments, but the date cannot be changed.

i If you set the time in 30-minute increments, any time zone settings and

settings for changing between summer and

standard time are lost (Y page 41).

40 Time settings S y s t e m s e t t in g s

i The following navigation system functions

require the time, time zone and summer/

standard time to be set correctly in order

to work properly:

Rroute guidance on routes with time-

dependent traffic guidance

Rcalculation of expected time of arrival

Setting the time

X Press theW button.

X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Set Time and pressW to confirm.

X Set the time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The time is accepted.

Setting the time/date format

X Press theW button.

X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Format and pressW to confirm. The# symbols show the current settings.

Abbreviation Meaning

DD / MM / YY Day/Month/Year

(date format)

HH/MM Hours/Minutes

(time format)

You can set the 24-hour or the AM/PM

format.

X Set the format by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Setting the time zone and switching

between summer and standard time

X Press theW button.

X Select Time by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Time Zone and pressW to confirm. You will see a list of time zones. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the time zone and pressW to confirm.

X To switch automatic changeover on/

off: select Auto. Daylight Savings

Time On or Auto. Daylight Savings

Time Off by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The# dot indicates the current setting.

Fuel consumption display

Overview

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the

COMAND display shows fuel consumption.

If your vehicle is a dual energy vehicle and the

installed engine variant supports it, you can

call up other displays (see the separate

operating instructions).

Fuel consumption display 41

S y s t e m s e t t in g s

Calling up displays

X Press theW button.

X In the system menu, slide ZV the

COMAND controller up until the Full

Screen option is selected.

X PressW the COMAND controller. The system display is shown as full screen

(without system menu).

X Slide XVY the COMAND controller repeatedly until the fuel consumption

indicator appears.

The COMAND display shows the fuel

consumption for the last 15 minutes of the

journey.

Every bar of the graph displays the average

value for one minute.

The fuel consumption display may differ from

the display in the From Start trip computer

in the Tripmenu; see the vehicle Operator's

Manual.

Exiting full screen view

X PressW the COMAND controller. The system menu appears.

ON&OFFROAD display

Overview

The ON&OFFROAD display is available for the

M-Class.

The COMAND display can show the settings

and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.

You can find more information about the

ON&OFFROAD functions and the display

itself in the vehicle Operator's Manual.

Calling up displays

X Press theW button.

X In the system menu, slide ZV the COMAND controller up until the display/

selection window is selected.

X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the ON&OFFROAD display appears.

The COMAND display shows the settings

and status of the ON&OFFROAD functions.

Exiting the display

X Slide XVY the COMAND controller until the desired display (clock or fuel

consumption) is shown.

Text reader settings

Setting the text reader speed

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Text Reader Speed and pressW to confirm.

A list appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Voice Control System settings

Opening/closing the help window

In addition to the audible instructions, the

help window will show you other information

42 Voice Control System settings S y s t e m s e t t in g s

during voice control operation and the

individualization process.

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.

X Select Help Window and pressW to confirm.

You have switched the help window on

O or off.

Individualization

Introduction

You can use the individualization function to

fine tune the Voice Control System to your

voice and therefore improve voice

recognition. This means that other users'

voices will not be recognized as easily, and

therefore this function can be deactivated

(Y page 44).

Individualization comprises two parts and

takes approximately five minutes. It consists

of training the system to recognize a certain

number of digit sequences and voice

commands.

Starting new individualization

Individualization can only be started when the

vehicle is stationary. Before starting, switch

off all devices or functions which could

interfere, such as the radio or the navigation

system. After starting the session, the system

guides you through the training with spoken

instructions.

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.

X Select Start New Individualization

and pressW to confirm. You see and hear a prompt asking whether

you would like further information.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select No, the first part of

individualization begins. You will be asked

whether you would like to train digits or

voice commands.

If you select Yes, you will see and hear

information on the individualization

process. The first part of individualization

then begins automatically.

X To close the display: pressW the COMAND controller.

You will be asked whether you would like

to train digits or voice commands.

At the end of the first part, a prompt will

appear asking whether you wish to begin the

second part.

Voice Control System settings 43

S y s t e m s e t t in g s

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select No, individualization will be

canceled. The data from the first part is

stored automatically.

If you select Yes, the second part will begin.

Individualization is completed at the end of

the second part. You will see a message to

this effect. The data from the second part is

stored automatically.

Canceling the first or second part of

individualization

X Confirm Cancel by pressingW the COMAND controller.

A prompt appears asking whether you

really wish to cancel.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the voice training will be

canceled. The data from the part during

which you exited is not stored.

If you select No, the current part begins

again.

Deleting existing individualization data

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete Individualization and

pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you

really wish to delete.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

If you select Yes, the individualization is

deleted. You will see a message to this

effect.

Activating/deactivating

individualization

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Control and pressW to confirm.

X Select Individualization On and press

W to confirm. Individualization is activatedO or deactivated.

Bluetooth settings

General information about

Bluetooth

Bluetooth-capable devices, e.g. mobile

phones, must comply with a certain profile in

order to be connected to COMAND. Every

Bluetooth device has its own specific

Bluetooth name.

Bluetooth technology is the standard for

short-range wireless data transmission of up

to approximately 10 meters. Bluetooth

allows, for example, the exchange of vCards.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc.

44 Bluetooth settings S y s t e m s e t t in g s

Activating/deactivating Bluetooth

X Press theW button.

The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Activate Bluetooth and press

W to confirm.

This switches Bluetooth onO or off.

Setting the system language

This function allows you to determine the

language for the menu displays and the

navigation announcements. The navigation

announcements are not available in all

languages. If a language is not available, the

navigation announcements will be in English.

The selected language affects the characters

available for entry.

When you set the system language, the

language of the Voice Control System will

change accordingly. If the selected language

is not supported by the Voice Control System,

English will be selected.

X Press theW button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Language and pressW to confirm. The list of languages appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select the language by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

COMAND loads the selected language and

sets it.

Assigning the favorites button

This function is available, e.g. for theM-Class.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can

assign one or two favorites buttons. They are

located on the left (one favorites button

installed) or on the left and right (two favorites

buttons installed) beside the COMAND

controller (Y page 19).

You can select the following predefined

functions in a menu:

RDisplay On/Off: you can switch the

display off or on.

RFull Screen: 'Clock': you can show the

clock in full screen.

RFull Screen: 'Map': you can show the

map in full screen.

RSpoken Driving Tip: you can call up the

current driving recommendation.

RDisplay Traffic Messages: you can call

up traffic reports.

RNavigate Home: you can start route

guidance to your home address if you have

already entered and saved the address

(Y page 57).

RDetour Menu: you can call up the Detour

menu and then avoid a section of the route

and recalculate the route (Y page 82).

RCompass Screen: you can call up the

compass.

X To assign a favorites button: press the

W button.

X Select Settings by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Assigning the favorites button 45

S y s t e m s e t t in g s

X Select Assign As Favorite and press

W to confirm. The list of predefined functions appears.

If your vehicle is equipped with a favorites

button, the# dot indicates the currently selected function.

If your vehicle is equipped with two

favorites buttons, two asterisks indicate

the currently selected function for the

respective favorites button.

X Select the function by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If your vehicle is equipped with a favorites

button, it is assigned with the function

selected.

If your vehicle is equipped with two

favorites buttons, you will see a submenu.

X Select the favorites button by turning

cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The favorites button selected is assigned

the predefined function.

X To call up a favorite (example): press the

g favorites button.

This calls up the predefined function.

Importing/exporting data

You can use this function to copy your

personal COMAND data from one system

(vehicle) to another system (vehicle) or to

create a backup copy of your personal data

(exporting data) and import it again

(importing data). You can either use an SD

memory card or a USB storage device (e.g. a

USB stick) as temporary storage.

i Personal music files in the MUSIC REGISTER cannot be saved and imported

again using this function.

X Press theW button.

The system menu appears.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Import/Export Data and press

W to confirm.

X Select Import Data or Export Data and

pressW to confirm.

X To select a storage location: insert the

memory card (Y page 157) or insert the

USB storage device (Y page 157) into the

USB port.

X Select Memory Card or USB Storage and

pressW to confirm.

Example: export data menu

X To select all data: select All Data and

pressW to confirm. This function exports all the data to the

selected disc.

X Select the data type and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the previous entry, either

select the data type for the exportO or not.

46 Importing/exporting data S y s t e m s e t t in g s

! Never remove the stick or card when writing data to the USB stick or thememory

card You may otherwise lose data.

Reset function

You can reset COMAND to the factory

settings. Among other things, this will delete

all personal COMAND data (e.g. station

presets, entries in the destination memory

and in the list of previous destinations in the

navigation system, address book entries).

Resetting is recommended before selling or

transferring ownership of your vehicle, for

example.

Data on the internal hard drive, e.g. music

files in the MUSIC REGISTER, will be deleted.

You can also delete music files from the

MUSIC REGISTER using the "Delete all music

files" (Y page 170) function.

X Press theW function button.

X Select Settings by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Reset and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish

to reset.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

If you select Yes, a promptwill appear again

asking whether you really wish to reset.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, a message will be shown.

COMAND is reset and restarted.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Reset function 47

S y s t e m s e t t in g s

48

COMAND features ............................... 50

Introduction ......................................... 50

Basic settings ...................................... 52

Destination entry ................................ 53

Entering a point of interest ................ 66

Personal points of interest ................. 72

Search & Send ..................................... 76

Route guidance ................................... 77

Traffic reports ..................................... 88

Destination memory ........................... 94

Previous destinations ......................... 97

Map operation and settings ............... 98

Additional settings ........................... 105

Problems with the navigation sys-

tem ..................................................... 111

49

N a v ig a t io n

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

Introduction

Safety notes

G WARNING

For safety reasons, only enter a destination

when the vehicle is stationary. When the

vehicle is in motion, a passenger should enter

the destination. Study manual and select

route before driving.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately

14 m) every second.

COMAND calculates the route to the

destination without taking account of the

following:

RTraffic lights

RStop and right-of-way-signs

RLane merging

RParking or stopping prohibited areas

ROther road and traffic rules and regulations

RNarrow bridges

G WARNING

COMAND may give incorrect navigation

commands if the data in the digital map does

not correspond with the actual road/traffic

situation. Digital maps do not cover all areas

nor all routes within an area. For example, if

the traffic routing has been changed or the

direction of a one-way road has been

reversed.

For this reason, you must always observe

applicable road and traffic rules and

regulations during your journey. Road and

traffic rules and regulations always have

priority over the navigation commands

generated by the system.

G WARNING

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your

attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of

consulting the map display for directions.

Consulting the symbols or map display for

directions may cause you to divert your

attention from driving and increase your risk

of an accident.

General notes

Operational readiness of the navigation

system

The navigation system must determine the

position of the vehicle before first use or

whenever operational status is restored.

Therefore, you may have to drive for a while

before precise route guidance is possible.

GPS reception

Correct functioning of the navigation system

depends, amongst other things, on GPS

reception. In certain situations, GPS

reception may be impaired, there may be

interference or there may be no reception at

all, e.g. in tunnels or parking garages.

Entry restriction

On vehicles for certain countries, there is a

restriction on entering data.

The restriction is active above a vehicle speed

of about 3 mph. The restriction is deactivated

as soon as the vehicle speed drops below

about 2 mph.

When the restriction is active, certain entries

cannot be made. This will be indicated by the

50 Introduction N a v ig a t io n

fact that certain menu items are grayed out

and cannot be selected.

The following entries are not possible, for

example:

Rentering the destination city and street

Rentering a destination via the map

Rentering points of interest in the vicinity of

a city or via a name search

Rediting entries

Rusing the number keypad for direct entry

Other entries are possible, such as entering

points of interest in the vicinity of the

destination or current position.

Addresses can be entered via the Voice

Control System (see the separate Operating

Instructions) while the vehicle is in motion.

Switching to navigation mode

Option 1

X Press the function button.

The map is displayed with the menu either

shown or hidden.

Option 2

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Themap is displayed with themenu shown.

Map showing the menu; route guidance inactive

: Status bar

; Main function bar

= Current vehicle position

? Navigation menu bar

Map without the menu; route guidance inactive

: Current vehicle position

; Map orientation selected

= Map scale selected

"Route guidance active" means that you have

entered a destination and that COMAND has

calculated the route. The display shows the

route, changes of direction and lane

recommendations. Navigation

announcements guide you to your

destination.

"Route guidance inactive" means that no

destination has been entered and that no

route has been calculated.

Showing/hiding the menu

X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND

controller and, when the Full Screen

menu item is shown, pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the% back button.

The map can be seen in the full-screen

display.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller when the map is shown in full-

screen display.

Introduction 51

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Basic settings

Route settings

Setting route type and route options

You can select the following route types:

RFast Route: COMAND calculates a route

with the shortest (minimized) journey time.

RDynamic Traffic Route: same route

type as Fast Route. In addition, COMAND

takes any traffic reports received with

regard to the route into account during

route guidance. The navigation system can

help you avoid a traffic jam, for example, by

recalculating the route.

RDynamic TRF. Route After Request:

same route type as Dynamic Traffic

Route. After recalculating the route,

COMAND asks you whether you wish to

adopt the new route or whether you would

prefer to continue along the original route.

REco Route: the Eco Route (economic

route) is a variant of the Fast Route route

type. COMANDwill attempt tominimize the

journey distance at the expense of a slightly

increased journey time.

RShort Route: COMAND calculates a route

with the shortest possible (minimized)

route distance.

i On very long routes, the "Eco Route"more or less corresponds to the "Fast Route"

route type.

X To call up the route settingsmenu: press

the function button.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Route Settings and pressW to confirm.

Route settings menu (start of menu)

: To select the route type

; To set the number of persons in the

vehicle for the use of carpool lanes

= To set route options

X Select a route type and pressW to confirm. A filled circle indicates the current setting.

X Select the route option(s) and pressW to confirm.

The route options are switched onO or off , depending on the previous status.

i If you change the route type and/or the route optionswhile route guidance is active

(the route has been calculated), COMAND

will calculate a new route.

If you change the route type and/or the

route options while route guidance is

inactive (no destination has been entered

yet), COMAND uses the new setting for the

next route guidance.

i The route calculated may, for example, include ferry connections, even if the

Avoid Ferries route option is switched

on.

In some cases, e.g. when calculating

particularly long routes, COMAND may not

be able to take all the selected route

options into account.

X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

52 Basic settings N a v ig a t io n

Setting the number of persons in the

vehicle for the use of carpool lanes

For route calculation, you can take HOV or

carpool lanes into account.

If you use HOV or carpool lanes, please

observe the applicable laws as well as the

local and time limitation conditions.

Carpool lanesmay only be used under certain

conditions. Normally you can use these lanes

when two people are traveling in the vehicle.

However, there are lanes that can only be

used when three or four people (e.g. in New

York) travel in the vehicle. In California, lone

drivers can use a carpool lane if their vehicle's

emission level/fuel consumption is below a

fixed threshold.

Carpool lanes may be reserved for specific

times (e.g. during the peak period).

Carpool lanes are identified by HOV symbols

on special road signs and by markings on the

road. On the road signs, you may also see the

word CARPOOL. The lanes are arranged as a

separate lane next to the others or are built

as a physically separate lane.

Depending upon the Number of Occupants

in Vehicle setting, COMAND uses HOV or

carpool lanes when calculating a route.

COMAND then guides you with visual and

acoustic driving instructions onto or away

from HOV or carpool lanes.

X In the Route Settingsmenu, select Number

of Occupants in Vehicle by turning

cVd the COMAND controller.

X PressW the COMAND controller.

X Select 1, 2 or More than 2 by turning

cVd and confirm by pressingW. The# dot indicates the current setting.

Destination entry

Introduction to destination entry

G WARNING

For safety reasons, only enter a new

destination when the vehicle is stationary.

You could otherwise be distracted from the

traffic conditions, cause an accident and

injure yourself and others.

The following destination entry options are

available:

Rentering a destination by address

Rentering a destination from the destination

memory

Rentering a destination from the list of last

destinations

Rentering a destination using the map

Rentering a destination using geo-

coordinates

Rentering an intermediate stop

Rentering waypoints

Rentering a point of interest

Rentering a personal point of interest

Rentering a destination using "Search &

Send"

Destination entry 53

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Entering a destination by address

Introduction

When entering an address as the destination,

you have the following options:

Rentering the state/province, city/ZIP code

and street

Rentering the state/province, city and

center

Rentering the state/province, city/zip code,

street and house number

Rentering the state/province, city/zip code,

street and intersection

Rentering the state/province, street, city

and house number

Rentering the state/province, street and

house number

Rentering the state/province, street and

intersection

i You can only enter those cities, streets, zip codes etc. that are stored in the digital

map. This means that for some countries,

you cannot enter zip codes, for example.

Example: entering an address

The following is a step-by-step example of

how to enter an address. The destination

address is as follows:

New York (state)

New York (city)

40 Broadway

Of course, you can freely enter information

like state/province, city, street and house

number, for example to enter your home

address.

Calling up the address entry menu

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Dest. by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Address Entry and pressW to confirm.

The address entry menu appears. If you

have previously entered a destination, this

will be shown in the display.

Address entry menu

Depending on the sequence in which you

enter the address and on the data status of

the digital map, somemenu itemsmay not be

available at all or may not yet be available.

Example: after entering state/province, the

menu items Map, No., Center,

Intersection, Save and Start are not

available; or the menu item ZIP is not

available if the digital map does not have any

zip codes.

Selecting a state/province

X Select State/Prov in the address entry

menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu with the available lists appears:

54 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n

RLast States/Provinces

RStates (U.S.A.)

RProvinces (Canada)

X To select a list: turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The list of selected states/provinces

appears.

X To select a state/province: turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The address entrymenu appears again. The

state/province selected has now been

entered.

Entering the city

X Select City in the address entry menu by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You will see the city list either with the

character bar (option 1) or as a selection

list (option 2).

Option 1: city list with the character bar

X Enter NEW YORK. Instructions for entering

characters can be found in the "Entering

characters in navigation mode (entering a

city)" section (Y page 28).

Option 2: city list as selection list

City list

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

The address entrymenu appears again. The

city has now been entered.

Entering a street name

X Select Street in the address entry menu

by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You will see the street list either with the

character bar (option 1) or as a selection

list (option 2).

Option 1: street list with character bar

X Enter BROADWAY. Instructions for entering

characters using city input as an example

can be found in the "Entering characters in

navigation mode (entering a city)" section

(Y page 28).

Option 2: street list as selection list

Destination entry 55

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Street list

X Select a street by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If an entry features theG icon, it cannot be uniquely assigned and a selection list

will open, allowing you to select the desired

entry.

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

The address entrymenu appears again. The

street has now been entered.

Entering the house number

It is not possible to enter a house number until

a street has been entered.

X Select No. in the address entry menu by

turning cVd and sliding ZV the

COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You will see the house number list either

with the character bar (option 1) or as a

selection list (option 2).

Option 1: house number list with

character bar

X Enter 4 and 0. Instructions for entering

characters using city input as an example

can be found in the "Entering characters in

navigation mode (entering a city)" section

(Y page 28).

Option 2: house number list as selection

list

House number list

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

The address entrymenu appears again. The

house number has now been entered.

56 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n

Starting route calculation

You can now have COMAND calculate the

route to the address entered or save the

address first, e.g. as your home address (My

address) (Y page 57).

Address entry menu with destination address

: Destination address

; To start route calculation

X In the address entry menu, confirm Start

by pressingW. If no other route has been calculated, route

calculation starts immediately (Option 1). If

another route has already been calculated

(route guidance is active), a prompt

appears (option 2).

i Continue is displayed instead of Start when Calculate Alternative Routes is

activated in the navigation menu

(Y page 82), option 2.

Option 1 no route guidance active: route

calculation starts. While route calculation is

in progress, an arrow will indicate the

direction to your destination. Below this, you

will see a message, e.g. Calculating Fast

Route

Once the route has been calculated, route

guidance begins. If the vehicle is traveling on

a non-digitized road, the system displays the

linear distance to the destination, the

direction of the destination and the Off

Mapped Road message. The entries for the

estimated time of arrival and the distance to

the destination are, in this case, displayed in

gray.

Option 2 route guidance is already

active: if route guidance is already active, a

prompt will appear asking whether you wish

to terminate the currently active route

guidance.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, COMAND will stop route

guidance and start route calculation for the

new destination.

If you select No, COMAND will continue

with the active route guidance.

i Route calculation takes a certain amount of time. The time depends on the distance

from the destination, for example.

COMAND calculates the route using the

digital map data.

The calculated route can differ from the

ideal route, for example because of

incomplete map data. Please also refer to

the notes about the digital map

(Y page 109).

Entering and saving your home address

You can either enter your home address for

the first time (option 1) or edit a previously

stored home address (option 2).

X Option 1: enter the address, e.g. a city,

street and house number (Y page 55).

X Once you have entered the address, select

Save in the address entry menu by turning

cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save as "My Address" and press

W to confirm.

COMAND stores your home address as My

Address in the destination memory.

X Option 2: proceed as described under

"Option 1".

A prompt appears asking whether the

current home address should be

overwritten.

Destination entry 57

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X Select Yes and pressW to confirm.

After selecting Yes, the Saving

Procedure Successful message

appears.

Entering a ZIP code

X Select ZIP in the address entry menu by

turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You will see the zip code list either with the

character bar (option 1) or as a selection

list (option 2).

Option 1: ZIP code list with character bar

X Enter a ZIP code. Instructions for entering

characters using city input as an example

can be found in the "Entering characters in

navigation mode (entering a city)" section

(Y page 28).

: Digits entered by the user

; Digits automatically added by the system

= List entry most closely resembling the

characters entered so far

? To switch to the list without the character

bar

A To delete the entire entry: press and hold;

to delete the last character: press briefly

B Available characters

C Selected character

D Unavailable characters

E Character bar

F To cancel an entry

G List

Option 2: ZIP code list as selection list

ZIP code list

X Select the desired zip code by turning

cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

If COMAND is able to assign the ZIP code

unambiguously to a specific address, the

address entry menu appears again. The ZIP

code appears in place of the city's name.

If COMAND cannot assign the ZIP code

unambiguously to a specific address, the

address entry menu also appears again.

The ZIP code is automatically entered. You

can now enter the street for a more precise

location. Only streets in the area covered

by the entered ZIP code are available.

X Start route calculation (Y page 57).

Entering a center

Entering a center will, for example, delete a

previously entered street.

X Select Center (center) in the address entry

menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You will see the center list either with the

character bar (option 1) or as a selection

list (option 2).

Option 1: center list with character bar

X Enter a center. Instructions for entering

characters using city input as an example

can be found in the "Entering characters in

58 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n

navigation mode (entering a city)" section

(Y page 28).

Option 2: center list as selection list

X Select a center by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

The address entrymenu appears again. The

center selected has been entered.

X Start route calculation (Y page 57).

Entering an intersection name

X Select Intersection (intersection) in the

address entry menu by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You will see the intersection list either with

the character bar (option 1) or as a

selection list (option 2).

Option 1: intersection list with character

bar

X Enter an intersection. Instructions for

entering characters using city input as an

example can be found in the "Entering

characters in navigation mode (entering a

city)" section (Y page 28).

: List entry most closely resembling the

characters entered so far

; List

= Character bar

Option 2: intersection list as selection list

X Select an intersection by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

The address entrymenu appears again. The

intersection selected has been entered.

X Start route calculation (Y page 57).

Destination entry 59

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Selecting a destination from the

destinationmemory (e.g. My address)

Introduction

The destination memory always contains an

entry named "My address". You may wish to

assign your home address to this entry, for

example (Y page 57), and select it for route

guidance. This entry is always located at the

top of the list in the destination memory.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select From Memory and pressW to confirm.

You will see the destination memory list

either with the character bar (option 1) or

as a selection list (option 2).

Option 1: destination memory list with

character bar

X Enter a destination, e.g. "My address".

Instructions for entering characters using

city input as an example can be found in the

"Entering characters in navigation mode

(entering a city)" section (Y page 31).

: Character entered by the user

; Characters automatically added by the

system

= List entry most closely resembling the

characters entered so far

? To switch to the selection list

A To delete an entry

B Characters not currently available

C Character bar

D Currently selected character

E To cancel an entry

F Characters currently available

Option 2: destination memory list as

selection list

Destination memory list

X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Irrespective of the option, pressW to confirm your selection.

The address entry menu appears again.

"My address" has been entered.

60 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

Entering a destination from the list of

last destinations

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select From Last Destinations and

pressW to confirm.

X Select the desired destination by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and pressing W to confirm. The address entrymenu appears again. The

destination address selected has been

entered.

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

Once the route has been calculated, route

guidance begins (Y page 77).

i Further information on the "Last destinations" memory can be found on

(Y page 97).

Entering a destination using the map

Calling up the map

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Using Map and pressW to confirm. You see the map with the crosshair.

: Current vehicle position

; Crosshair

= Details of the crosshair position

? Map scale selected

Display= depends on the settings selected

in "Map information in the display"

(Y page 102). The current street name can

be shown, provided the digital map contains

the necessary data, or the coordinates of the

crosshair if the geo-coordinate display is

switched on and the GPS signal is strong

enough.

Moving the map and selecting the

destination

X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.

Destination entry 61

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn

cVd the COMAND controller, the scale bar appears.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set. Turning clockwise zooms out from themap;

turning counter-clockwise zooms in.

X To select a destination: pressW the COMAND controller once or several times.

You will see either the address entry menu

with the destination address or, if COMAND

is unable to assign a unique address, a

selection list.

X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If the destination is within the limits of the

digital map, COMAND attempts to assign

the destination to the map.

If the destination can be assigned, you will

see the address entry menu with the

address of the destination. If not, you will

see the entry Destination From Map.

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

Entering a destination using geo-

coordinates

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Using Geo-Coordinates and

pressW to confirm. An entry menu appears.

You can now enter the latitude and longitude

coordinates.

X To change a value: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To move the mark within the line: slide

XVY the COMAND controller.

X To move the mark between the lines:

slide ZV the COMAND controller.

X To confirm the value: pressW the COMAND controller.

i If the selected position is outside the digital map, COMAND uses the nearest

digitized road for route calculation. You will

see the The position is off the map

message. If the selected position is located

over a body of water, you will see the

message: The destination is in a

body of water. Please select

another destination.

Entering an intermediate stop

Introduction

You can use this function to enter an

intermediate stop while the vehicle is in

motion. COMAND provides a selection of

62 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n

predefined destinations in eight categories

for this purpose, e.g. FILLING STATION or

CAF.

When you have entered your intermediate

stop, COMAND automatically recalculates

the route to the main destination.

Entering predefined destinations

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Stopover and pressW to confirm.

Option 1: the route does not have an

intermediate stop.

Intermediate stop categories

X Select a category; see option 2.

Option 2: the route already has an

intermediate stop.

X Select Change Stopover and pressW to confirm.

X To select a category: select a category by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. COMAND first searches in the selected

category for destinations along the route.

COMAND then searches for destinations in

a radius of approximately 60 mi from the

current vehicle position.

If COMAND finds destinations, a list

appears on the right-hand side of the

display.

Search results for the chosen category COFFEE SHOP (example)

: Highlighted intermediate stop, current

distance from the vehicle position and

name of the intermediate stop

The intermediate stops along the route are

displayed at the top of the list, sorted by

increasing distance from the vehicle's current

position. Below this, you will see the

intermediate stops that COMAND finds in the

vicinity of the vehicle's current position.

i For intermediate stops that are not located along the calculated route, the

linear distance is shown.

X Select the intermediate stop by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The address entry menu appears, showing

the destination address.

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

If COMAND does not find any destinations,

you will see a message to this effect.

X Confirm OK by pressingW.

X Select a different category.

Destination entry 63

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Deleting an intermediate stop

If an intermediate stop has already been

entered, you can delete it.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Stopover and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete Stopover and pressW to confirm.

COMAND deletes the intermediate stop

and recalculates the route to the main

destination.

Entering waypoints

Introduction

You can map the route yourself by entering

up to two waypoints. The sequence of the

waypoints can be changed at any time.

i An intermediate stop is always between the current position of the vehicle and the

first waypoint.

Creating waypoints

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Dest. in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Intermediate Destinations and

pressW to confirm. The destination is entered in the menu.

Waypoint menu without waypoints

X Confirm the symbol for waypoint 1 by

pressingW the COMAND controller.

X Confirm Set by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X Enter the waypoint via one of the following

options.

Selection Step

Address Entry X Enter a

destination by

address

(Y page 54).

From Memory X Select a

destination from

the destination

memory

(Y page 60).

From Last

Destinations

X Select a

destination from

the list of last

destinations

(Y page 61).

64 Destination entry N a v ig a t io n

Selection Step

From POIs X Enter a point of

interest

(Y page 66).

From Personal

POIs

X Enter a

destination from

the personal

points of interest

(Y page 75).

Using Map X Enter a

destination using

the map

(Y page 61).

Using Geo-

Coordinates

X Enter a

destination using

the geo-

coordinates

(Y page 62).

When the entry is complete, the waypoint

appears.

X To accept the waypoint: confirm OK by

pressingW.

X To display the details: select Details by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To make a call: select Call with the

COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. COMAND switches to telephone

mode (Y page 122).

i Thismenu item is available if thewaypoint has a telephone number and a mobile

phone is connected to COMAND

(Y page 116).

X To call up the map: select Map with the

COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X You can move the map and select the

destination.

X To store thewaypoint in thedestination

memory: select Presets with the

COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

When you have accepted the waypoint, it is

entered in the waypoint menu. The example

shows the menu with two entered waypoints.

Waypoint menu with two waypoints

Editing waypoints

You can:

Rchange waypoints

Rchange the sequence in the waypointmenu

Rdelete waypoints

To change the sequence, both waypoints

must be entered.

X To change waypoints: select the symbol

for waypoint 1 or 2 in the waypoint menu

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Edit and pressW to confirm.

X Use one of the destination entry options

offered.

Destination entry 65

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X To change the sequence of the

waypoints: select Swap in the waypoint

menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The entries are swapped.

X To delete waypoints: select the symbol

for waypoint 1 or 2 in the waypoint menu

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm.

i You can delete a waypoint directly after entry using this menu item.

Accepting waypoints for the route

X Select Start in the waypoint menu by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The route is calculated with the entered

waypoints.

i Cont. is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate Alternative Routes is

activated in the navigation menu

(Y page 82), option 2.

In the example, there are both waypoints1

and2.

Entering a point of interest

Calling up the points of interest menu

Points of interest are predefined destinations

within categories, e.g. a gas station in the

AUTOMOTIVE category.

You can look for points of interest:

Rin the vicinity of the destination

Rnear the current vehicle position

Rin the vicinity of another city

Rusing its name

Rusing a phone number

You can also select points of interest in the

map that are available on the map view

shown.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select From POIs and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

Points of interest menu ("Search by name" selected)

66 Entering a point of interest N a v ig a t io n

Defining the position for the point of interest search

Selection Characteristic Instructions

Near

Destination

Entry is only possible

when route guidance is

active.

X Select Near Destination from the

points of interest menu (Y page 66) and

pressW to confirm.

X Select a point of interest category

(Y page 68).

Current

Position

The system looks for a

point of interest in the

vicinity of the current

vehicle position.

X Select Current Position in the points

of interest menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select a point of interest category

(Y page 68).

Other City After entering a city, the

system looks for the

point of interest within

the city.

Option 1

X Select Other City in the points of

interest menu and pressW to confirm.

X If desired, select the state/province

(Y page 54).

X Enter the city. Proceed as described in

the "Entering a city" section

(Y page 55).

X Select a point of interest category

(Y page 68).

Option 2

X Enter a city in the address entry menu

(Y page 54).

X Select POI and pressW to confirm.

X Select a point of interest category.

Entering a point of interest 67

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Selection Characteristic Instructions

Search By Name You can call up all the

points of interest in the

digital map or focus your

search on the three

previously selected

positions.

X Select Search By Name in the points of

interest menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select All POIs or one of the three

previously selected positions.

The point of interest list with character

bar appears.

X Proceed as described in the "point of

interest list with character bar" section

(Y page 71).

Search By Phone

Number

This function gives you

access to all points of

interest that have a

phone number.

X Select Search By Phone Number and

pressW to confirm. You will see a list of phone numbers.

X Proceed as described in the "point of

interest list with character bar" section

(Y page 71).

Searching by point of interest

category

After selecting the menu items, the point of

interest categories appear:

RNear Destination

RCurrent Position

ROther City (after entering a city)

i If you have selected Search By Name and then defined the position for the search,

the point of interest list with character bar

appears (Y page 71).

X Select a point of interest category by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

In the example, the AUTOMOTIVE category

has been selected. TheG arrow behind an entry shows that other categories are

available.

X Select a category and pressW to confirm. In the example, the Highway Rest Stop

category has been selected. The search for

points of interest begins in the vicinity of

the selected position.

68 Entering a point of interest N a v ig a t io n

Point of interest search near the current position (example)

i The point of interest search is canceled when 50 points of interest have been

found.

COMAND searches within a radius of

approximately 60 mi.

If COMAND fails to find a point of interest

within this radius, it extends its search

range to approximately 125 mi.

If COMAND finds one point of interest

within this radius, it finishes the search.

Once the search is completed, the point of

interest list is displayed.

Point of interest list

Introduction

The point of interest list displays the search

results for the selection made.

Point of interest list (example)

An entry contains the following information:

Ran arrow that shows the linear direction to

the point of interest

Rthe linear distance to the point of interest

Rthe name of the point of interest

i The arrow and linear distance to the destination are not visible if you have

entered a point of interest within a specific

city.

The arrow is also not shown when a point

of interest in the vicinity of the destination

has been entered.

Depending on the point of interest

selected, COMAND uses different

reference points in determining the linear

distance to the destination:

Rvicinity of current position: the linear

distance is the distance of the point of

interest from the current vehicle

position.

Rvicinity of destination: the linear distance

is the distance from the destination

entered to the point of interest.

Selecting a point of interest

The example has been selected in the point

of interest category BAR & RESTAURANT.

X Select the point of interest in the point of

interest list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The complete address of the point of

interest selected is shown.

Entering a point of interest 69

N a v ig a t io n

Z

: Point of interest with address

; To start route calculation

= To store an address in the destination

memory

? To display details

A To make a call (when available)

B To cancel selection

C To show an address on the map

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

X To store an address in the destination

memory: select Save and pressW to confirm. You can now select storage

options (Y page 96).

X To show the detailed view: select

Details and pressW to confirm.

X To make a call: select Call and pressW to confirm. COMAND switches to

telephone mode (Y page 122).

i This menu item is available if the point of interest has a telephone number and a

mobile phone is connected to COMAND

(Y page 116).

X To call up the map: select Map and press

W to confirm.

X You can move the map and select the

destination (Y page 61).

ZAGAT survey service

Entries with the Z icon contain additional

ZAGAT information. ZAGAT rates restaurants,

for instance, in regard to the quality of the

food, furnishing, service, and provides an

average pricing level as well as a general

description.

X Select the entry with the Z icon by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The ZAGAT evaluations appear.

1 ZAGAT ratings

2 To display details

X To show a description: select Details

and pressW to confirm.

ZAGAT example description

70 Entering a point of interest N a v ig a t io n

Point of interest list with character bar

If you have selected Search By Name in the

point of interest menu (Y page 66) and then

defined the position for the search

(Y page 67), the point of interest list with

character bar appears.

Depending on your selection, you can select

all available points of interest on the digital

map or the points of interest in the vicinity of

the selected position.

Search by name in the vicinity of the destination (example)

Proceed as described in the "Searching for a

phone book entry" section (Y page 126).

i If COMAND can assign the characters entered to one entry unambiguously, the

address entry appears automatically.

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

Selecting a point of interest using the

map

You can select points of interest that are

available in the selected (visible) section of

the map.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Guide in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If points of interest are available:

Depending on the map scale selected,

point of interest icons appear on the map.

The scale at which the icons are displayed

on the map varies according to the icon.

You can select the icons that COMAND will

display (Y page 101).

If no points of interest are available, youwill

see a message to this effect.

i You also see this message if you have selected the No Symbolsmenu item under

"Map display" (Y page 101).

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

Point of interest on the map

The point of interest is highlighted on the

map; you will see information on the upper

edge of the display.

X To select a point of interest: select

Next or Previous and pressW to confirm.

X To show details for the selection: select

Details and pressW to confirm.

X To change to the map: slide ZV the COMAND controller.

You can move the map and select the map

section.

Entering a point of interest 71

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the point

of interest should be used as the

destination.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, route guidance starts.

If you select No, you can choose a newpoint

of interest.

i Cont. is displayed instead of Startwhen Calculate Alternative Routes is

activated in the navigation menu

(Y page 82), option 2.

Personal points of interest

Settings

Overview

Personal destinations can be:

Rdisplayed on the map

Rhighlighted on the map as you approach

them

Rmanaged in categories

Rmanaged

Calling up the "Personal points of

interest" menu

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.

Displaying personal points of interest

on the map

The personal points of interest are shown on

the map with an icon according to their

category.

X Select Display Personal POIs On Map

in the menu and pressW to confirm. You can select different categories.

Selection Explanation

Not

Classified

Standard entry for

personal points of

interest

COMAND i This function is not available in the USA

and Canada.

If you have created your own categories

(e.g. "Fishing", "Hotels") (Y page 73),

these will also be displayed.

72 Personal points of interest N a v ig a t io n

X Select a category and pressW to confirm. The icon display is switched onO or off , depending on the previous status.

i The icons are displayed on the map at scales of 1/16 mi, 1/8 mi and 1/4 mi.

Visual information for personal points

of interest

When the vehicle is approaching a personal

point of interest and the display of the

relevant category is switched on, it is

highlighted on the map.

X Select Visual Warning For Personal

POIs in the menu and pressW to confirm.

X PressW to confirm the entry. This will switch the visual information for

the personal points of interest of this

category onO or off, depending on the previous setting.

Example: visual information for a personal point of interest

Managing categories for personal

points of interest

X Select Manage Categories For

Personal POIs in the menu and pressW to confirm.

X To create a new category: select New and

pressW to confirm.

X Enter the name of the category. Proceed as

described under "Entering characters" in

the "Entering characters in the address and

phone books" section (Y page 31).

X Select the icon and pressW to confirm.

A list with icons appears. You can assign an

icon to the category.

X Select an icon by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You have created a new category with a

name and icon. This category appears

when selecting the display on the map or

when selecting the destination.

X To rename a category or to change an

icon: select Rename or Change Icon and

pressW to confirm.

X Proceed as described under "To create a

new category".

Personal points of interest 73

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X To delete a category: select Delete and

pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the

category should be deleted.

i If you delete a category, all points of interest of this category are also deleted.

X Select Yes and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the category will be

deleted.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

Managing personal points of interest

X Select Manage Personal POIs in the

menu and pressW to confirm.

X Select Not Classified, COMAND or your

own category and pressW to confirm.

X Select a personal point of interest and

pressW to confirm. The personal point of interest is displayed.

The following functions are described in the

"Select as destination" section

(Y page 75):

Rrenaming

Rchanging the category

Rdeleting

Saving personal points of interest

There are three ways to save personal points

of interest. You must insert an SD memory

card to do so. The No Memory Cardmessage

otherwise appears.

i Personal points of interest and routes are written to thememory card in a data format

based upon open format GPX (GPS

Exchange Format). Geodata is saved in this

format.

Option 1

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).

X Hide the menu (Y page 51) to display the

map in full screen mode.

X PressW the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds.

The current position of the vehicle is saved

as a personal point of interest on the SD

memory card in the "Unclassified"

category.

i The crosshair position is saved while scrolling the map (Y page 61).

Option 2

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 61).

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save Position As Personal

POI or Save Crosshair Pos. As

Personal POI ("Move map" function

active) and pressW to confirm. The list of personal categories appears.

X Select a category and pressW to confirm.

X Name for the personal point of interest.

Proceed as described under "Entering

characters" in the "Entering characters in

the address and phone books" section

(Y page 31).

Option 3

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).

X Select Save from the address entry menu

and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save As Personal POI and press

W to confirm.

X Select a category.

X Enter the name.

The current address is saved as a personal

point of interest on the SD memory card.

74 Personal points of interest N a v ig a t io n

Selecting as the destination

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select From Personal POIs and press

W to confirm. A list with the categories for personal

points of interest appears.

X Select an entry and pressW to confirm.

Selection Explanation

Not

Classified

Standard entry for

personal points of

interest.

COMAND This function is not

available in the USA and

Canada.

Coffee Shops Icon and category that

you have created yourself

(Y page 73).

In the example, the Coffee Shops category

has been selected.

The personal points of interest for this

category are shown.

X Select a personal point of interest and

pressW to confirm.

X To rename a personal point of interest:

select Rename and pressW to confirm.

X To change the category: select Change

Category and pressW to confirm.

X To change to the map: select Map and

pressW to confirm. The position of the personal point of

interest is shown in the map.

i An icon is displayed according to the "Displaying personal points of interest on

the map" setting (Y page 72).

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm. If route guidance has been activated, a

prompt will appear asking whether you

wish to accept the personal point of

interest as the destination.

Personal points of interest 75

N a v ig a t io n

Z

If route guidance has not been activated,

route calculation for the personal point of

interest will start immediately.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the personal point of

interest is accepted as the destination.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

X To make a call: select Call and pressW to confirm. COMAND switches to

telephone mode (Y page 122).

i This menu item is available if the personal point of interest has a telephone number

and if a mobile phone is connected to

COMAND (Y page 116).

X To delete a personal point of interest:

select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish

to delete the point of interest.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the personal point of

interest is deleted.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

Search & Send

Notes

i To use Search & Send, your vehicle needs to be equipped with mbrace, a navigation

system and a valid mbrace subscription.

Search & Send is a service assisting you in

entering destinations for the navigation

system. This mbrace service can send a

destination address directly from the Google

Maps website to the navigation system of

your vehicle.

Selecting and sending a destination

address

i Please observe the notes on entering an address on themaps.google.com

website.

X Call up themaps.google.comwebsite and

destination address in the address entry

field.

X Click the corresponding button to send the

destination address to the e-mail address

registered with mbrace.

X Enter the e-mail address you specified

when setting up your mbrace account into

the corresponding field in the "Send" dialog

window.

X Click "Send".

Calling up a destination address

X Press thembrace information button

to start downloading the destination

address onto the navigation system of your

vehicle.

i If you have sent more than one destination address to your vehicle's

navigation system, you will need to call up

the information individually for every

address to be downloaded.

X Select Yeswhen the prompt for starting the

navigation system is shown. The window

for starting the navigation system appears

(Y page 57).

76 Search & Send N a v ig a t io n

X Select Start.

or

X Select No to store the downloaded

destination in the destination memory for

later use.

i The destination addresses are downloaded in the same order as they are

sent. If you own several Mercedes-Benz

vehicles equipped with an mbrace

subscriber account, each destination

address can be downloaded by each

vehicle associated with the e-mail address

registered for your mbrace account.

Route guidance

General information

G WARNING

COMAND calculates the route to the

destination without taking into account the

following, for example:

RTraffic lights

RStop and right-of-way signs

RLane merging

RParking or stopping prohibited areas

ROther road and traffic rules and regulations

RNarrow bridges

COMAND may give incorrect navigation

commands if the data in the digital map does

not correspond with the actual road/ traffic

situation. For example, if the traffic routing

has been changed or the direction of a one-

way road has been reversed.

For this reason, you must always observe

applicable road and traffic rules and

regulations during your journey. Road and

traffic rules and regulations always have

priority over the navigation commands

generated by the system.

Route guidance begins once a route has been

calculated (Y page 57).

COMAND guides you to your destination by

means of navigation commands in the form

of audible navigation announcements and

route guidance displays.

The route guidance displays can only be seen

if the display is switched to navigation mode.

If you do not follow the navigation

announcements or if you leave the calculated

route, COMAND automatically calculates a

new route to the destination.

If the digital map contains the corresponding

information, the following applies:

Rwhen selecting a route, COMAND tries to

avoid roads that only have limited access,

e.g. roads closed to through traffic and non-

residents.

Rroads that have time restrictions (e.g.

closed on Sundays and public holidays) are

considered for route guidance on days

when they are open. For this purpose, the

relevant times must be correctly stored in

the database.

Route guidance 77

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Change of direction

Introduction

Changes of direction have three phases:

RPreparation phase

RAnnouncement phase

RChange-of-direction phase

Preparation phase

COMAND prepares you for the upcoming

change of direction. Based on the example

display below, the change of direction is

announced with the Prepare to turn

rightmessage. You see the full-screen map.

Example display: preparation phase

: Next road

; Point at which the change of direction

takes place (light blue dot)

= Current vehicle position (the tip of the

triangle indicates the vehicles direction

of travel)

? Current road

Display? depends on the setting selected

for "Information in map" (Y page 102).

Announcement phase

COMAND announces the imminent change of

direction. Based on the example display

below, the change of direction is announced

with the Please turn right in 500 ft.

and follow the message.

The announced distance to the next change

of direction depends on the type of road and

its permissible speed limit.

The display is now split into two sectors. In

the left half, you see the normal map view.

The right half shows an enlarged section of

the area around the intersection (Crossing

Zoom) or a 3D image of the road's coursewith

the route indicating the next maneuver.

Example display: announcement phase

: Next road

; Change of direction (turn right here)

= Graphic representation of the distance to

the next change of direction

? Distance to the next change of direction

A Route (highlighted in blue, shown in both

the left and right displays)

B Point at which the change of direction

takes place (light blue dot, shown in both

the left and right displays)

i The filled-in section of visual display for distance= gets shorter the nearer you get

to the announced change of direction.

Change-of-direction phase

COMAND announces the imminent change of

direction. In the example, the Now turn

right announcement is made 150 ft. before

the change of direction.

The display is split into two halves, as in the

announcement phase.

78 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n

Example display: change-of-direction phase

: Current vehicle position (the tip of the

triangle indicates the vehicles direction

of travel)

; Graphic representation of the distance to

the next change of direction

= Distance to the next change of direction

Once the change of direction is completed,

COMAND automatically switches back to full-

screen display.

Example of a display without changes

of direction

: Route (highlighted in blue)

; Current vehicle position

= Current road

? Map orientation selected

A Map scale selected

Lane recommendations

Overview

On multilane roads, COMAND can display

lane recommendations for the next change of

direction. The corresponding data must be

available in the digital map.

COMAND displays lane recommendations

B based on the next two changes of

direction. The number of lanes applies to the

point at which the next change of direction is

required.

Example display

: Point of the next change in direction (light

blue circle)

; Point of the change of direction after next

= Next change of direction (in this case, turn

off to the right)

? Graphic representation of the distance to

the next change of direction

A Distance to the next change of direction

B Possible lane (light blue)

C Recommended lane (dark blue)

D Lane not recommended (gray)

E Current vehicle position: the tip of the

triangle indicates the vehicles direction

of travel

Route guidance 79

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Display and description of lane recommendations

The colors used in the lane recommendation display vary depending on whether day or night

design is switched on.

Lane Day design Night design

Recommended laneC

In this lane, you will be able to complete the

next two changes of direction without

changing lanes.

Dark blue Light blue

Possible laneB

In this lane, you will only be able to complete

the next change of direction without

changing lanes.

Light blue Dark blue

Lane not recommendedD

In this lane, you will not be able to complete

the next change of direction without

changing lanes.

Gray Gray

HOV or carpool lanes

A route may be calculated taking the use of

HOV or carpool lanes into account. You can

use HOV or carpool lanes depending on the

number of persons in the vehicle as well as

the local and time limitation conditions.

i This information is stored in themap data.

i You can enter the number of persons in the vehicle (Y page 53). In this section, you

can also find more information on HOV or

carpool lanes.

When the system guides you onto or away

from HOV or carpool lanes, COMAND issues

visual and acoustic driving instructions.

: HOV symbol on the road sign

; HOV symbol on the car pool lane

Announcing street names

If the function is switched on, the name of the

street which you are turning into is

announced.

Announcements are not made in these

languages in all countries. They are made

when relevant street names for the selected

language are available in the database.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

80 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Announce Street Names and press

W to confirm. Depending on the previous status, the

function is switched onO or off.

Canceling or continuing route

guidance

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Dest. in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X To cancel route guidance: select Cancel

Route Guidance and pressW to confirm.

or

X To continue route guidance: select

Continue Route Guidance and pressW to confirm.

COMAND calculates the route.

Destination or area of destination

reached

When you reach your destination, COMAND

displays a checkered flag and route guidance

is automatically ended.

If the destination is not in close proximity to

a digitized street, the Area of

destination reached message appears

when the destination is reached.

Navigation announcements

Repeating navigation announcements

G WARNING

Navigation announcements are intended to

direct you while driving without diverting your

attention from the road and driving.

Please always use this feature instead of

consulting the map display for directions.

Consulting the symbols or map display for

directions may cause you to divert your

attention from driving and increase your risk

of an accident.

i Audible navigation announcements are muted during a telephone call.

If you havemissed an announcement, you can

call up the current announcement at any

time.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select RPT in the navigation system menu

bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

Switching navigation announcements

on/off

X To switch off: press the8 button

during an announcement.

You will briefly see the message: The

driving instructions have been

muted.

X To switch on: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select RPT in the navigation system menu

bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

i COMAND automatically switches the

navigation announcements back on when:

Ryou have a new route calculated.

Ryou switch COMAND back on again or

start the engine.

Route guidance 81

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Reducing volume during a navigation

announcement

The volume of an active audio or video source

can be automatically reduced during a

navigation announcement.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Audio Fadeout and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the previous status, the

function is switched onO or off.

Setting the volume manually

X Adjust the volume using theq control knob during a navigation announcement.

or

X Select RPT on the map display when the

menu is shown, and set the volumewith the

q control knob.

Avoiding a section of the route

blocked by a traffic jam

This function blocks a section of the route

ahead of you. You can set the length of the

blocked route section. If possible, COMAND

calculates a detour around the blocked

section of the route.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Detour and pressW to confirm.

X To block a section of the route: select

Longer or Shorter repeatedly and confirm

usingW until the desired section has been selected.

i The total length of the section that can be blocked is defined by the digital map. The

menu items are available accordingly.

X To start route calculation: select Start

and pressW to confirm.

X To delete the blocked section: select

Delete while the message is shown and

pressW to confirm. COMAND calculates the route without the

block.

Selecting an alternative route

Introduction

With the "Alternative route" function, routes

other than the original one can be calculated.

Option 1

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Alternative Route and pressW to confirm.

On the right-hand side, you will see

information on the currently selected

alternative route, e.g. distance, estimated

remaining driving time and estimated time

of arrival. Route sections used (e.g.

freeways, tunnels) are displayed as

symbols.

82 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n

Example: route 1

The route is shown in themapwith a dark blue

line.

Routes 1 to 3 are calculated with the current

settings for the route type and route options

(Y page 52). Route 4 is the economic route

(eco route).

Route 4 (example: eco route)

The eco route is shown on the alternative

route map with a green line.

Option 2

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Calculate Alternative Routes

and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, the

function is switched onO or off.

Function is activated: alternative routes

are calculated directly after the destination

is entered.

Menu functions

X To select the next or previous

alternative route: select Next or

Previous and pressW to confirm.

X To start route guidance using the

selected alternative route: select Start

and pressW to confirm. COMAND starts route guidance on the

chosen alternative route.

Displaying destination information

You can display destination information for

the destination, for both waypoints and for

the intermediate stop, if they are part of the

route.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Destination Information and

pressW to confirm. Destination information is displayed.

Example: destination information

Route guidance 83

N a v ig a t io n

Z

The example shows:

Rthe destinationO

Rtwo waypoints

Rthe relevant information on distance,

estimated time of arrival and estimated

remaining driving time

i If a mobile phone is connected to COMAND (Y page 116) and a phone

number is included in the destination

information, you can call it.

X To call up further destination

information: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To close the destination information:

slide XVY the COMAND controller or press thek button.

Route overview

You can use the route overview tomove along

the active route section by section and view

information and details about each section of

the route.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Route Browser and pressW to confirm.

At the top of the display, you will see

information about the highlighted route

section, for example the distance to be driven

on the road and road designation. The

highlighted route section is marked in white

with a red border on the map.

X To view the next or previous route

section: select Next or Previous and

pressW to confirm.

i If the first or last route section is highlighted, you cannot select Previous or

Next.

X To zoom in or out of the map: selectN orM and pressW to confirm.

X To close the route overview: select

Back and pressW to confirm.

Route display

You can see the route before starting your

journey. This function is only available when

the vehicle is stationary.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Route in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Route Demonstration and press

W to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears.

X To get to the destination: pressW to confirm the highlighted symbol.

X To stop the route display: confirm the

symbol by pressingW.

84 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n

Example: route display stopped

: Road name and city display when route

display has been stopped

; Distance of the crosshair from current

vehicle position

X To get to the current vehicle position:

pressW to confirm the symbol for the current vehicle position.

X To change the map scale: select Scale

and pressW to confirm. The scale bar appears.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Recording the route

Notes

If you have activated COMAND and the SD

memory card has been inserted, you should

not take it out of the slot.

When you record a route, COMAND uses so-

called support points and displays the route

as a series of lines. If the route is then

calculated, COMAND attempts to align the

recorded route with the digital map.

The support points of the route may not be on

a digitized road.

This is often the case for routes that have

been calculated using map data from other

sources.

Calling up the Routes menu

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Record Routes.

Starting/ending recording

X To start recording: select Start

Recording in the Routes menu by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. During the recording, the recorded route is

shown behind the current vehicle position

with gray strokes (symbol for tire tracks).

X To end recording: select Stop

Recording in the Routes menu by turning

Route guidance 85

N a v ig a t io n

Z

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Displaying and editing the recorded

route

X Insert the SD memory card (Y page 157).

X Select List in the Routes menu by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Previously recorded routes are displayed.

X Select a route and pressW to confirm. The map appears with a menu. The

recorded route is shown in the map with a

blue dotted line.

Turning off from the route on the map

X Select Demo by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The map with the crosshair appears.

X Proceed as described in the "Route

demonstration" section (Y page 84).

Starting route calculation

X Select Start in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

COMAND attempts to align the recorded

route with the digital map.

Editing the route

You can change the route name and the icon.

X Select Edit in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To change the route name: select

Rename and pressW to confirm.

i The name cannot be changed while the vehicle is in motion.

X To change the icon: select Change Icon

and pressW to confirm.

X A description for both entries can be found

in the "Personal POIs" section under

"Managing categories for personal POIs"

(Y page 73).

Changing direction for route calculation

You can set the icon for the route to the

starting point or to the destination, thereby

changing the direction for route calculation.

i During route calculation, one-way streets or turn restrictions, for example, are taken

into account. Therefore, the outward and

return routes may differ from each other.

86 Route guidance N a v ig a t io n

X Select Swap in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Deleting the route

X Select Delete in the menu by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A prompt appears askingwhether the route

should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the route will be deleted.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

Scanning the memory

The SD memory card is inserted.

X Select Memory in the Routes menu

(Y page 85) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The route memory is displayed.

Off-road and off-map

Important safety note

G WARNING

The COMAND navigation system may direct

you to off-road routes that your vehicle may

not be capable of traversing through without

damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is

the driver's sole responsibility to determine

the suitability of the route. Off-road routes

may be of varying conditions and their

appropriateness for use may be affected by

various factors such as time of day, time of

year and immediate weather conditions that

cannot be judged or taken into consideration

by the COMAND system.

Route guidance to a destination that is

not on a digitized road

COMAND can guide you to destinations

which are within the area covered by the

digital map, but which are not themselves

recorded on the map.

These destinations are known as off-road

destinations, which you can enter using the

map, for example. In these cases, COMAND

guides you for as long as possible with

navigation announcements and displays on

roads known to the system.

Example: route guidance to an off-road destination

: Off-road destination

; Off-road route section (dashed blue)

= Current vehicle position (the tip of the

triangle indicates the vehicles direction

of travel)

? Off-road (if available)

If the vehicle reaches an areawhich is not part

of the digital map, the display appears as a

split-screen view. On the right-hand side, an

arrow appears which points to off-road

destination:. You will hear the

announcement: "Please follow the arrow on

the display". As the vehicle approaches the

destination, the Area of destination

reached message appears.

Route guidance 87

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Route guidance from an off-road

location to a destination

If the vehicle position is within the area

covered by the digital map, but the map does

not contain any information about that

location, the vehicle is in an off-road location.

COMAND is also able to guide you to a

destination even from an off-road location.

At the start of the route guidance, you will see

the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow

and the distance to the destination. The arrow

shows the compass heading to the actual

destination.

The route is highlighted blue, starting from

the last recognized street the vehicle was on

before it left the map.

As soon as the vehicle is back on a road

known to the system, route guidance

continues in the usual way.

Route guidance from an off-map

location to a destination

If the vehicle position is outside the area

covered by the digital map, then the vehicle

is in an off-map location. COMAND is also

able to guide you to a destination even from

an off-map location.

At the start of the route guidance, you will see

the Off Mapped Road message, an arrow

and the distance to the destination. The

direction arrow shows the compass heading

to the destination.

The route is highlighted blue from the nearest

road known to the system.

As soon as the vehicle is back on a road

known to the system, route guidance

continues in the usual way.

Off-road during route guidance

Due to roadworks, for example, there may be

differences between the data on the digital

map and the actual course of the road.

In such cases, the system will temporarily be

unable to locate the vehicle position on the

digital map and thus considers the vehicle to

be in an off-road position.

In the display, you will see the Off Mapped

Road message, an arrow and the distance to

the destination. The direction arrow shows

the compass heading to the destination.

As soon as the system can assign the vehicle

position to the map again, route guidance

continues in the usual way.

Traffic reports

Conditions

To receive real-time traffic reports via

satellite radio, you require:

Roptionally available satellite radio

equipment

Ra subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio

Traffic Message Service

Further information on satellite radio is

available in the "Satellite radio" section

(Y page 148).

COMAND can receive traffic reports via

satellite radio and take account of these for

route guidance in the navigation system.

Received traffic reports are displayed in the

map either as text or as icons.

Real-time traffic reports in the map

COMAND can show certain traffic incidents

on the map. Traffic reports are shown on the

map at scales of 0.05 mi to 20 mi.

X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND

controller and, when the Full Screen

menu item is shown, pressW to confirm. The map can be seen in the full-screen

display.

X Turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired map scale is set.

88 Traffic reports N a v ig a t io n

1 Icon delimiting the section of the route

affected

2 Icon indicating an incident on the route

(traffic flow)

3 Destination

4 Map scale

Traffic reports 89

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Icon for real-time traffic reports

Icon Description Traffic reports in the map display List of

traffic

reports

Traffic

reports

Warning

(red)

This appears at the beginning of the

affected route section if route

guidance is active and the route leads

through an affected area.

Entry type:

warning

Entry

type:

warning

Traffic

incident

(yellow)

This appears at the beginning of the

affected route section if route

guidance is active and the route leads

through an area affected by a traffic

incident.

Entry type:

caution

Entry

type:

caution

Traffic jam

on route

(stop-and-go

traffic)

This appears at the beginning of a

traffic jam (average speed

25 45 mph) if route guidance is

active and the route leads through an

area of congested traffic.

Yellow car icons may appear in

conjunction with this icon.

Entry type:

traffic jam

on route

(stop-and-

go traffic)

Entry

type:

traffic jam

on route

(stop-and-

go traffic)

Traffic jam

on the route

This appears at the beginning of a

traffic jam (average speed

5 20 mph) if route guidance is active

and the route leads through an area of

congested traffic.

Red car icons may appear in

conjunction with this icon.

Entry type:

traffic jam

on route

Entry

type:

traffic jam

on route

Blocked

route section

on the route

Appears at the beginning of a blocked

route section if route guidance is

active and the route leads through the

blocked section.

The XXXX icons may appear in

conjunction with this icon.

Entry type:

blocked

route

section

Entry

type:

blocked

route

section

Yellow

line with

arrows

Traffic

incidents

Possible delays (e.g. roadworks)

Appears on the side of the road

affected (direction of travel)

(Not

available)

(Not

available)

90 Traffic reports N a v ig a t io n

Icon Description Traffic reports in the map display List of

traffic

reports

Traffic

reports

Green

line with

arrows

Unimpeded

traffic flow

No delays

Only appears on the side of the road

(direction of travel) on which traffic

flow is unimpeded

(Not

available)

(Not

available)

Red line

with

arrows

Warning

message

Incident on road

Appears on the side of the road

affected (direction of travel)

(Not

available)

(Not

available)

Displaying real-time traffic reports

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Traffic by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If the dialog field shows the No Traffic

Messages message, this means that:

Rno traffic reports have been received yet.

Rno traffic reports are available.

X To cancel the search: select Cancel and

pressW to confirm.

X To close the report window: select OK

and pressW to confirm.

If traffic reports exist, a list is shown.

The content of the list varies depending on

whether route guidance is active or not.

List when route guidance is not active

The list shows all the roads, areas or regions

for which reports are available.

A traffic report may refer to an area or a

region, e.g. if visibility is impaired due to fog.

X To read a traffic report: select a road,

area or region by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

List when route guidance is active

The first list shows the roads, areas and

regions that lie along the route and for which

traffic reports are available.

Traffic reports 91

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X Show all messages: select All

Messages by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You see a list of all roads, areas and regions

for which traffic reports are available, even

if the reports do not affect your route.

X To show a traffic report: select a road,

area or region and pressW to confirm.

X To close the list: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Example: traffic report

1 Depending on your selection: Messages

On Route or All Messages

2 Report 8 of 16 for the road affected

3 Report text

4 Road, area or region affected by traffic

reports

5 Icon for state/province

6 Icon for report type, e.g. traffic flow

message

X To scroll within a report or to access

the next report: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To return to the report: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Displaying traffic reports on the map

X Select Traffic Symbol Information by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Traffic symbol information on the map (example)

: Affected roads with indication of direction

; Icon for report type, e.g. traffic flow

message

X Select Next or Previous by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm in order to continue highlighting

traffic icons.

X To change the map scale: select Map by

sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You can now zoom in or out of the map.

X To show the detailed view: select

Details and pressW to confirm.

92 Traffic reports N a v ig a t io n

Details on traffic symbol information (example)

X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Reading out traffic reports on the

route

Introduction

The read-aloud function is only availablewhile

route guidance is active. It reads out traffic

reports affecting the current route. You can

set the language (Y page 45) and the text

reader speed (Y page 42).

You can start the text reader function

manually or set it to automatic.

Starting the text reader function

manually

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select TMC by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Read out all messages on

route and pressW to confirm.

COMAND reads out the reports in sequence.

i If there are no reports for the route, the Read out all messages on routemenu

item is shown in gray and cannot be

selected.

X To switch off the read-aloud function:

select Cancel Read-Aloud Function and

pressW to confirm or press the8 button.

COMAND reads the current report aloud

and then exits the read-aloud function.

Automatic read-aloud function

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select Read Traffic Messages

Automatically and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch

the option onO or off.

Recalculating the route dynamically

The route types Dynamic Route and

Dynamic Route Only After

Request(Y page 52) take all relevant traffic

messages into account when calculating a

route.

If you have set the route type Dynamic

Route, COMAND guides you on the updated

route to your destination.

If you have set the route type Dynamic

Route Only After Request, a prompt

appears. You can decide whether to accept

the route suggested by COMAND, or continue

with the original route.

Traffic reports 93

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X To accept the suggested route: press

W the COMAND controller.

X To continue along the original route:

select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Destination memory

Home address (My address)

Entering the home address via address

entry

X Initially proceed as described in the

"Adopting an address book entry as a home

address" and confirm My Address by

pressingW.

X To enter the home address for the first

time: confirm New Entry by pressingW.

X To change the home address: select

Change in the menu showing the home

address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm New Entry by pressingW.

X In both cases, enter the home address as a

destination, e.g. as a city, street and house

number (Y page 54). Then, save the home

address (Y page 57).

Adopting an address book entry as a

home address

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Dest. in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select From Memory and pressW to confirm.

You will see the destination memory list

either with the character bar (option 1) or

as a selection list (option 2).

Option 1: destination memory list with

character bar

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly until the destination memory

list appears as a selection list.

Option 2: destination memory list as

selection list

The My Address entry is listed as the first

entry in the destination memory.

X Select My Address by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

94 Destination memory N a v ig a t io n

i If you have not yet entered any characters, the My Address entry is

automatically highlighted in the selection

list.

If no home address has been stored yet, you

can now assign an address book entry. If a

home address already exists, it is displayed

and you can alter it.

i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of entering the home

address for the first time. You can then

save the home address without having to

start route guidance.

X To enter the home address for the first

time: select Assign to Address Book

Entry and pressW to confirm.

X Choose Home, Work or Not Classified

and pressW to confirm.

X To change the home address: select

Change and pressW to confirm.

X Select Assign to Address Book Entry

and pressW to confirm.

i If you select New Entry, you are also offered the option of changing the home

address by entering an address. You can

then save the home address without having

to start route guidance.

X Choose Home, Work or Not Classified

and pressW to confirm. In both cases, youwill see the address book

either with the character bar or as a

selection list.

X To select an address book entry:

proceed as described in the "Searching for

an address book entry" section

(Y page 136).

X To confirm the selection: pressW the COMAND controller.

If no home address has been stored,

COMAND saves the entry. You will see a

message and then the address menu with

the selected address. Start is highlighted

automatically.

If a home address has already been stored,

you will see a prompt asking you whether

the My Address entry should be

overwritten.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, COMAND overwrites the

destination. You will see a message and

then the address menu with the selected

address. Start is highlighted

automatically.

If you select No, the list will appear again.

Selecting the home address for route

guidance

X Proceed as described in the "Selecting a

destination from the destination memory"

section (Y page 60).

Storing a destination in the

destination memory

Notes

This function also stores the destination in

the address book.

When the address book is full, no destinations

can be saved in the destination memory. You

must first delete address book entries

(Y page 137).

After destination entry

X The destination has been entered and is

shown in the address entry menu

(Y page 57).

X Select Save by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. You can now select storage options

(Y page 96).

During route guidance

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

Destination memory 95

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select Save Destination and pressW to confirm.

You can now select storage options

(Y page 96).

From the list of previous destinations

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select From Last Destinations and

pressW to confirm. The list of last destinations appears.

X Select a destination by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The destination address is shown.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. You can now select storage options.

Selecting storing options

X To save the destination without a

name: select Save Without Name and

pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the

destination memory and uses the address

as the destination name.

X To save the destination as My

Address: select Save as "My Address"

and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination in the

destination memory as My Address. If the

selected address book entry already

contains address data that can be used for

navigation (L icon), a prompt will appear

asking whether you wish to overwrite the

existing data.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the entry is overwritten.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

X To save the destination with a name:

select Save With Name and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm.

The input menu appears with data fields

and the character bar.

Example: saving a destination with a name

: Selected data field with cursor

; Character bar

X Proceed as described under "Entering

characters using the character bar" in the

"Entering characters in navigation mode

(entering a city)" section (Y page 31).

X Then, select and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the destination under the

name entered.

Assigning a destination to an address

book entry

An address with complete address data that

is suitable for navigation can be assigned to

a pre-existing address book entry. You can

then later start route guidance to this address

straight from the address book

(Y page 139).

X Select Assign to Address Book Entry

and pressW to confirm.

96 Destination memory N a v ig a t io n

X Select a category, e.g. Home, and pressW to confirm.

You will see the address book either with

the character bar or as a selection list.

X To select an address book entry:

proceed as described in the "Searching for

an address book entry" section

(Y page 136).

COMAND stores the data if the address

book entry selected does not yet contain

navigable address data.

If the selected address book entry already

contains navigable address data, a prompt

will appear asking whether you wish to

overwrite the existing data.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, COMAND stores the data.

Deleting a destination or the home

address from the destinationmemory

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select From Memory and pressW to confirm.

You will see the destination memory list

either with the character bar (option 1) or

as a selection list (option 2).

X Option 1: destination memory list with

character bar: proceed as described in the

"Entering characters using the character

bar" section (Y page 31).

X Option 2: destination memory list as

selection list: select a destination by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You see the address data of the selected

entry.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you wish

to delete the destination.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the

destination. You will see a message to this

effect.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

i If the navigable address data for the destination being deleted is also assigned

to an address book entry, COMAND will

also delete this data from there. If the

corresponding address book entry does

not contain any further data, such as

telephone numbers, COMAND deletes the

entire address book entry.

Previous destinations

Introduction

COMAND automatically stores the previous

destinations for which the route calculation

has been started. If the memory is full,

COMAND deletes the oldest destination. You

can also save a destination from the list of

previous destinations in the destination

memory. It will be stored there permanently.

Storing a destination permanently in

the destination memory

X Proceed as described in the "From the list

of previous destinations" section

(Y page 96).

Previous destinations 97

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Storing the vehicle position in the list

of previous destinations

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save vehicle position and press

W to confirm. COMAND stores the current vehicle

position as a destination in the list of

previous destinations.

Storing the crosshair position in the

list of previous destinations

A crosshair appears on the map if you have

moved the map manually. You can store the

crosshair position as a destination in the list

of previous destinations.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system

menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save crosshair position and

pressW to confirm.

Deleting one of the previous

destinations

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Destination in the navigation

system menu bar by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm.

X Select From last destinations and

pressW to confirm. The list of last destinations appears.

X Select the desired destination and press

W to confirm. The destination address appears.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry

should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Map operation and settings

Note

Company logos displayed on the map are

trademarks of the respective companies and

used solely for the purpose of indicating the

location of these companies. The use of such

logos on the map does not indicate approval

of, support of or advertising by these

companies for the navigation system itself.

Setting the map scale

X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND

controller and, when the Full Screen

menu item is shown, pressW.

X To call up the scale bar: as soon as you

turn cVd the COMAND controller, scale bar= appears.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.

98 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n

: Set map scale as a number with unit

; Currently set map scale as indicated by

the needle on the scale bar

= Map scale

Unit of measurement: in the COMAND

display depends on the selectionmade for the

instrument cluster (see the vehicle

Operator's Manual).

Moving the map

Showing the crosshair

X To hide themenu: slide ZV the COMAND

controller and, when the Full Screen

menu item is shown, pressW.

X To scroll the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller. A crosshair appears on themap. If you slide

it again, the map moves in the

corresponding direction under the

crosshair.

Map with crosshair

: Current vehicle position

; Crosshair

= Details of the crosshair position

? Map scale selected

Display= may be the name of a street, for

example, provided the digital map contains

the necessary data. Alternatively, it may show

the geo-coordinate position of the crosshair

if the Geo-coordinates display is switched

on (Y page 102).

Hiding the crosshair and centering the

map on the vehicle position or

destination

X Press the% back button twice.

The crosshair disappears and the map is

set to the vehicle position.

or

X Set the map to the vehicle position; see the

explanation below.

Centering the map on the vehicle or

destination position

Centering the map on the vehicle

position

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system

menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Vehicle Position Map and press

W to confirm or, if the crosshair is shown, press the% back button.

This hides the crosshair.

Centering on the destination

This function requires that a route to a

destination has been calculated. If the route

includes waypoints and an intermediate stop,

the map can also be set to these positions.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Position in the navigation system

menu bar by slidingV and turning cVd

Map operation and settings 99

N a v ig a t io n

Z

the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Destination Position Map and

pressW to confirm. The crosshair position is set to the relevant

destination.

Map settings

Calling up the map settings menu

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

Setting the map orientation

Map orientation

: Current map orientation

The following display modes are possible:

R0 North orientation (the map view is displayed so that north is always up).

ROrientation in the direction of travel (the

map is displayed so that the direction of

travel is always up; the orange point of the

icon points north).

R Bird's-eye view (the map is displayed so

that the direction of travel is always up; the

map projection reproduces the curvature

of the earth and the orange point of the icon

points north).

R 3D map (the map is displayed so that

the heading is always up; from a scale of

1 km the map displays elevation; the

orange point of the icon points north).

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select Map Orientation and pressW to confirm.

A# dot indicates the current setting.

Map orientation menu

X Select North Up, Heading Up, Bird's-

eye View or 3-D Map by turning cVd the

100 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n

COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

A# dot indicates the new setting.

Setting thepoint of interest icons on the

map

You can set the points of interest you wish to

have displayed as symbols on themap. Points

of interest are, for example, gas stations,

hotels, cinemas and restaurants.

The following settings are possible:

RStandard Symbols

Symbol display determined by the factory

settings.

RPersonal Symbols

You can determine the symbols yourself.

RNo Symbols

The map does not show any symbols.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select POI Symbols On Map and press

W to confirm.

X Select Standard Symbols, Personal

Symbols or No Symbols.

If you select Personal Symbols, the list of

points of interest appears.

X To switch the symbol display on/off:

select a point of interest by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the previous state of the

symbols, they will either be shownO or hidden. You can switch on the symbol displays formore than one point of interest.

X To switch all personal symbols on/off:

select All and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state of the

personal symbols, they will either be shown

O or hidden.

If the function is switched onO, the individual points of interest are grayed out

and the previously selected settings remain

unchanged.

If the function is switched off, you can re-select the individual points of interest.

They show the most recently selected

settings.

i The list shows all symbols that are contained on the digital map across all

countries. However, not all points of

interest are available in all countries. As a

result, certain point of interest symbols

may not be displayed on the map, even if

the symbol display is switched on.

X To exit the menu: press the% back

button.

Map operation and settings 101

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Map information in the display

During route guidance, you can have map

information shown at the bottom edge of the

display.

Showing text information

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select Text Information On Map and

pressW to confirm. A# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Arrival Time / Distance,

Current Street, Geo-coordinates or

None and pressW to confirm.

X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Arrival time/distance to the destination

Arrival time/distance display switched on

: Icon for destination

; Distance to the destination

= Icon for estimated time of arrival

? Estimated time of arrival

You can only see this display during route

guidance. While scrolling the map

(Y page 61), you will see additional data, e.g.

road names, depending on the crosshair

position, if the digital map supports this data.

i During route calculation, or if the vehicle is traveling on a non-digitized road, the

linear distance to the destination is shown.

In this case, the display will be grayed out.

Road display

Road display active

: Road names or numbers, e.g. for freeways

Geo-coordinate display

Geo-coordinate display active

: Current height above average sea level

(rounded)

; Current vehicle position: latitude

coordinates

= Current vehicle position: longitude

coordinates

? Number of GPS satellites currently being

used

There must be sufficient GPS reception for all

displays to be shown. If this is not the case,

the display will be grayed out. Height

display: may vary from the actual value,

because the navigation system uses the GPS

signals for the calculation.

102 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n

While scrolling the map (Y page 61), you will

see the geo-coordinates of the crosshair

position. Height display: and number of

satellites used? are not displayed.

"None" menu option

Display switched off

: Current map orientation

i During the "Move map" function you can see additional information depending on

the position of the crosshair, such as a road

name, if the digital map supports this data.

Switching the topographical map on/

off

The topographical map uses different colors

to depict elevation. The color key generally

reflects the topography's dominant

vegetation or the ground's perceived color

when seen from the air, for example:

Rgreen (grass) for lowland

Ryellow, brown (woodland) for hills

Rgray (stone) and white (snow) for

mountains.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select Topographic Map and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the previous state, switch

the option onO or off.

Freeway information

When driving on freeways, you can have the

nearest gas stations, rest areas, etc., as well

as your current distance from them, shown

on the right-hand side of the display.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select Highway Information and press

W to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch

the option onO or off.

Example: freeway information

The entries show the number of the freeway

and freeway exits as well as their distance

from the vehicle's current position.

Switching the city model on/off

When the city model is switched on, the map

shows buildings as 3D models.

i The city model is only shown for "Bird's- eye view" or "3D map".

It is available for map scales 50 m and

100 m.

Map operation and settings 103

N a v ig a t io n

Z

The data required for displaying buildings

is not available for all cities.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select City (3D) and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch

the option onO or off.

Example: city model

Showing/hiding intersecting streets

If route guidance is inactive, intersecting

streets can be shown on the upper edge of

the display.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select Next Intersecting Street and

pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous state, switch

the option onO or off.

Intersecting street (example: city route)

Intersecting street (example: freeway route)

Coordinates on the map

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Settings and pressW to confirm.

The map settings menu appears.

X Select Compass On Map and pressW to confirm.

A menu appears.

X Select Never, When Off-Road or When

Route Guidance Inactive and pressW to confirm.

The selected setting is accepted.

104 Map operation and settings N a v ig a t io n

Traffic information on the map

If you subscribe to the SIRIUS XM Satellite

Radio Traffic Message Service, traffic

information can be displayed on themap. You

can select three categories for the display.

X To switch the displays on/off: pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X SelectTraffic Information On Map and

pressW to confirm.

X Select Incidents and/or Speed & Flow

and/or Free Flow and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the previous state, switch

the option onO or off.

Traffic information Display on themap

Traffic incidents Road sections are

illustrated with a

yellow line and

arrows=.

Speed & Flow Road sections are

illustrated with

yellow or red car

icons:.

Yellow car icons:

traffic jam; average

speed 25 45 mph

Red car icons: traffic

jam; average speed

5 20 mph

Free Flow Road sections are

illustrated with a

green line and

arrows;.

: Speed & Flow

; Free Flow

= Traffic incidents

Additional settings

Avoiding an area

General information

COMAND makes it possible to avoid areas

you do not wish to drive through.

The calculated route may include an area to

be avoided if:

Ryour destination is located in such an area.

Rthe route uses roads that lead through an

area to be avoided.

i Highwayswithin blocked areas are always taken into consideration in the route

calculation.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Avoid Area and pressW to confirm.

If you have not yet set an area to be

avoided, a menu appears (option 1).

If you have already set one or more areas

to be avoided, a list appears (option 2).

Additional settings 105

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Option 1: the menu appears

X Select Using Map, From Memory or From

Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.

If you select Using Map, the map with the

crosshair appears.

After choosing between From Memory or

From Personal POIs, either the

destination memory (Y page 94) or the list

of categories for personal points of interest

appears (Y page 75).

X Choose the destination or personal point of

interest and pressW to confirm.

X If the destination address is displayed,

select Continue and pressW to confirm. The map appears.

The crosshair marks the center of the area

that is to be avoided.

X To move the map: slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.

X To set the map scale: as soon as you turn

cVd the COMANDcontroller, the scale bar appears. Turning clockwise zooms out from

the map; turning counter-clockwise zooms

in.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.

X To apply a block: pressW the COMAND controller.

A red square appears on the map.

X To adjust the size of the square: turn

cVd the COMAND controller. The square is enlarged or reduced.

X To confirm the settings: pressW. The list appears. The previously selected

area to be avoided has been added and

activated.

X Follow the instructions listed under "Option

2: the list appears".

Option 2: the list appears

"Avoid area" list (example)

i Available list places are named Area and are shown in gray.

X Select Avoid New Area by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

A menu appears.

106 Additional settings N a v ig a t io n

X Select Using Map, From Memory or From

Personal POIs and pressW to confirm.

If you select Using Map, the map with the

crosshair appears.

After choosing between From Memory or

From Personal POIs either the

destination memory (Y page 94) or the list

of categories for personal points of interest

appears (Y page 75).

X Choose the destination or personal point of

interest and pressW to confirm.

X If the destination address is displayed,

select Continue and pressW to confirm. The map appears.

X Proceed according to the instructions

under "Option 1: the menu appears" if you

wish to set a new area to be avoided in the

map.

Switching an avoided area on/off

X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The avoided area is switched onO or off depending on the previous status.

Displaying and changing an avoided

area

X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display / Change and pressW to confirm.

The area to be avoided is indicated in the

map.

X To change the location of the area: slide

the COMAND controller XVY, ZV or aVb. The area is moved on the map.

X To adjust the size of the area: turn

cVd the COMAND controller. The area is enlarged or reduced.

X To confirm the change: pressW the COMAND controller.

The list appears and the change is entered.

Deleting a set area

X Select an entry in the list by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A query appears asking whether the entry

should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No.

If you select Yes, the entry is deleted.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

SIRIUS XM service

Displaying SIRIUS XM service

information

You can display the SIRIUS XM service

information.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Additional settings 107

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X Select SIRIUS Service and pressW to confirm.

The window on the right half of the display

shows the telephone number of the

provider (SIRIUS XM) and the serial number

of your service module for receiving traffic

messages.

Registering for the SIRIUS XM traffic

report service

X Call the traffic report provider's phone

number shown on the screen.

i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS

XM Radio website at

http://www.sirius.com (USA) or

http://www.siriuscanada.com

(Canada).

Once the connection has been established:

X Follow the instructions of the operator.

The activation process may take up to ten

minutes.

If registration is not included when

purchasing the system, your credit card

details will be required to activate your

account.

Compass function

In the compass view, you can see the current

direction of travel, the current height above

sea level and the coordinates of the vehicle

position, for example.

X To switch on navigation mode: press the

function button.

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Pos. in the navigation systemmenu

bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Compass and pressW to confirm.

Compass (example)

: Current direction of travel

; Current height above average sea level,

rounded

= Current vehicle position: longitude

coordinates

? Number of GPS satellites currently being

used

A Current vehicle position: latitude

coordinates

B Currently set steering angle of the front

wheels

i To display current height;, the system

must be able to receive at least four

satellites. Steering angleB can be a

maximum of 35 in both directions.

X To exit the display: confirm Back by

pressingW or press the% button.

Showing the map data version

X To show themenu: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Select Navi in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Map Version and pressW to confirm.

The map data version number is shown.

Information about new versions of the

digital map can be obtained from an

authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

108 Additional settings N a v ig a t io n

Updating the digital map

Introduction

The digital maps generated by the map

software become outdated in the same way

as conventional road maps. Optimal route

guidance can only be provided by

the navigation system in conjunction with the

most up-to-date map software.

Information about new versions of the digital

map can be obtained from an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. You can have the

digital map updated there with a DVD, or you

can update it yourself.

i The update process can take a long time (over an hour), depending on the size of the

digital map. During this time, you will only

be able to switch on radio mode and to

accept incoming calls. The update will be

completed more quickly if the vehicle is

stationary.

If you carry out the update with the engine

switched off and the starter battery has

insufficient power, COMAND may

automatically switch off during the process

in order to protect the battery. If this

occurs, restart the update with the engine

running.

G WARNING

Never leave the engine running in an enclosed

space. The exhaust gases contain carbon

monoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases constitutes

a health hazard and could lead to loss of

consciousness or even death.

Updating process

X Insert the DVD into the DVD changer

(Y page 154).

COMAND checks whether the digital map

on the DVD is compatible with the

navigation system and system software.

A prompt then appears asking if you want

to install the database. Versions of the

database currently installed and the

database that is to be installed are

displayed.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

After selecting Yes, an activation code

must be enteredwhen installing a database

for the first time. You will receive the

activation code when you buy the

navigation DVD.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

X Enter the activation code.

After entering the activation code

correctly, COMAND starts updating the

digital map. Once the update is finished,

you will see a message.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Take the DVD out of the slot.

While the update is running, you will see a

message to this effect and a progress bar. The

navigation system is not operational until the

update is complete.

i You cannot eject the DVD during the update. If you switch off COMAND during

the update, the update is interrupted. It

then continues from where it was

interrupted when the system is restarted.

COMANDmay prompt you to change the DVD

during the update.

X Press theV load/eject button.

X Take the DVD out of the slot.

Additional settings 109

N a v ig a t io n

Z

X Insert the requested DVD.

Once the update has been successfully

completed, you will see a message to this

effect.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Take the DVD out of the slot.

The update is complete.

If the update is not successfully completed,

you will see amessage that themap update

is not possible.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Take the DVD out of the slot.

110 Additional settings N a v ig a t io n

Problems with the navigation system

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND is unable to

continue route

guidance after the

journey has been

interrupted.

Route guidance is canceled if you interrupt the journey for more

than two hours.

"Interrupting the journey" refers to stopping the vehicle.

"Continuing route guidance" refers to switching COMAND back on

and driving on.

X Continue route guidance (Y page 81).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND is unable to

determine the vehicle's

position.

COMAND has to redetermine the position of the vehicle if the

vehicle has been transported (e.g. by ferry, by motorail or after

towing).

X Start the vehicle and pull away.

COMAND determines the vehicle's position. Depending on the

driving situation, this may take some time.

Route guidance may be restricted during the determination of

the vehicle's position.

When positioning is complete, route guidance is resumed with

navigation announcements and route guidance displays.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The Navigation

Unavailable message

appears.

COMAND has an integrated hard drive on which the digital map is

stored.

To protect the integrated hard drive against damage, COMAND

deactivates it at very high and low temperatures. The navigation

system will then be temporarily unavailable.

X Let the vehicle and COMAND cool down.

X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.

If an area of the hard drive has a malfunction, COMAND can no

longer access the map data in this area, for example when

calculating a route.

X To hide the message: switch COMAND off and then on again.

The navigation system will be operational again until it has to

access the faulty area of the hard drive oncemore. Themessage

will then reappear.

X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problems with the navigation system 111

N a v ig a t io n

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

You see a message

informing you that the

DVD containing the

digital map is

incompatible with the

system software.

The DVD containing the digital map cannot be used for the update.

X To confirm the message: pressW the COMAND controller.

X Eject the DVD.

X Have the database checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

The map software

update has failed.

The DVD is dirty.

X Clean the DVD.

X Restart the update.

The DVD is scratched.

X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

There is overheating due to excessive temperatures in the vehicle

interior.

X Wait until the vehicle interior has cooled down.

X Restart the update.

COMAND's integral hard drive is faulty.

X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andM Solutions

COMAND asks for an

activation code during

the map update.

The digital map is secured with an activation code.

X Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

112 Problems with the navigation system N a v ig a t io n

COMAND features ............................. 114

General information ......................... 114

Telephony via theBluetooth inter-

face .................................................... 115

Reception and transmission volume 120

Telephone operation ......................... 120

Using the phone book ...................... 125

Using call lists ................................... 129

Using the speed dial list ................... 131

Text message (SMS) ......................... 133

Using the address book ................... 135

113

T e le p h o n e

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

General information

Introduction

COMAND offers telephony via the

Bluetooth interface.

When connecting a Bluetooth-capable

mobile phonewith PBAP (PhoneBookAccess

Profile), contacts are automatically

downloaded to COMAND.

With a suitablemobile phone, you can use the

hands-free system and receive vCards via the

Bluetooth interface.

You can use the text message (SMS) function

(receiving and reading) if the mobile phone

supports the MAP (Message Access Profile)

Bluetooth profile.

More detailed information on suitable mobile

phones and on connecting with Bluetooth-

capable mobile phones with COMAND can be

found on the Internet at

http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call

the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center on

1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) for

the USA or on 1-800-387-0100 for Canada.

Safety notes

G WARNING

A driver's attention to the road must always

be his/her primary focus when driving. For

your safety and the safety of others, we

recommend that you pull over to a safe

location and stop before placing or taking a

telephone call. If you choose to use themobile

phone while driving, please use the handsfree

device and only use the mobile phone when

weather, road, and traffic conditions permit.

Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from

using a cellular mobile phone while driving a

vehicle.

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is

covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately

14 m) every second.

G WARNING

Excessive electromagnetic radiation may

constitute a health hazard to yourself and

others.

There is scientific discussion surrounding the

possible health risks posed by

electromagnetic fields. You can reduce this

risk by using an exterior aerial.

Therefore, only use mobile communication

equipment if it is connected to the exterior

aerial of the vehicle.

Call disconnectionwhile the vehicle is

in motion

A call may be disconnected if:

Rthere is insufficient network coverage in

certain areas.

Ryou move from one transmitter/receiver

area (cell) into another and no channels are

free.

Ryou use a SIM card which is not compatible

with the network available.

Operating options

You can operate the telephone by:

Rusing the COMAND controller:

turn cVd.

slide XVY or ZV.

114 General information T e le p h o n e

pressW.

Rpressing the6 or~ button and

using the telephone keypad on COMAND

Rpressing the6 or~ button on the

multifunction steering wheel

Rusing the Voice Control (see the separate

Voice Control operating instructions)

Unless stated otherwise, the descriptions and

illustrations in this section refer to COMAND.

Function restrictions

The telephone is not ready for use in the

following situations:

Rthe telephone automatically tries to log on

to a network. If no network is available, you

may not be able to make a "911"

emergency call. If you attempt to make an

outgoing call, the No Servicemessagewill

appear for a short while.

911 emergency call

G WARNING

The 911 emergency call system is a public

service. Using it without due cause is a

criminal offense.

The following requirements must be fulfilled

for a 911 emergency call:

Rthe mobile phone must be switched on.

Ra network must be available.

Ra valid and operational SIM card must be

inserted in the mobile phone.

Rthemobile phone is connected toCOMAND

via Bluetooth.

If you cannot make an emergency call, you

must arrange rescue measures yourself.

X Enter numbers on COMAND (Y page 121).

X Press the6 button.

The telephone makes the connection.

X Wait for the emergency call center to

respond and then describe the emergency.

Telephony via the Bluetooth

interface

Conditions

On the mobile phone

For telephony via COMAND's Bluetooth

interface, a Bluetooth-capable mobile

phone is required.

i Not all mobile phones available on the market are equally suitable. More detailed

information on suitable mobile phones and

on connecting Bluetooth-capable mobile

phones with COMAND can be found on the

Internet at

http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.

Alternatively, call the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

(for USA) or Customer Relations at

1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

The battery of the mobile phone should

always be kept sufficiently charged in order

to prevent malfunctions.

In preparation for telephoning via the

Bluetooth interface, you should check the

following items on yourmobile phone (see the

mobile phone operating instructions):

RHands-Free Profile

The mobile phone must support Hands-

Free Profile 1.0 or above.

RBluetooth visibility

On certain mobile phones, the device itself

must be made "visible" to other devices, as

well as activating the Bluetooth function

(see the mobile phone operating

instructions).

RBluetooth device name

Every Bluetooth device has its own

Bluetooth device name. This device name

is freely definable, but can be identical for

all devices from the same manufacturer. It

is therefore recommended that you change

this name so that you can easily recognize

Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 115

T e le p h o n e

Z

your mobile phone (see the mobile phone

operating instructions).

i Some displays (e.g. the signal strength) depend on the supported version of the

Hands-Free Profile.

X Switch on the mobile phone and enter the

PIN when prompted to do so (see the

mobile phone operating instructions).

X Activate Bluetooth functions and, where

necessary, Bluetooth visibility on the

mobile phone (see the mobile phone

operating instructions).

On COMAND

X Activate the Bluetooth function in

COMAND (Y page 45).

Connecting a mobile phone

General information

Before using your mobile phone with

COMAND for the first time, you will need to

connect it.

When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is

connected automatically.

Connecting comprises:

Rsearching for a Bluetooth-capable mobile

phone

Rsubsequently authorizing it

You can connect up to 15 mobile phones.

If the mobile phone supports the PBAP

(Phone Book Access Profile) and MAP

(Message Access Profile) profiles, the

following contacts and messages are

downloaded into COMANDwhen connecting:

Rphone book

Rcall lists

Rtext messages

Information on both profiles can be found in

the "General notes" section (Y page 114).

Searching for a mobile phone

X Press the% function button on

COMAND.

X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu

by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.

X Select Update and pressW to confirm.

COMAND searches for Bluetooth

telephones within range and adds them to

the Bluetooth telephone list.

The duration of the search depends on the

number of Bluetooth telephones within

range and their characteristics.

Example: Bluetooth phone list

: Currently connected# and authorized mobile phoneY

; Mobile phone not within range but

previously authorized (L appears in gray)

= Mobile phone in range and authorized

(L appears in black)

? Newly detected mobile phone within

range but not yet authorized (noY icon

yet)

The Bluetooth telephone list shows all

mobile phones within range and all previously

authorized mobile phones, whether or not

they are in range.

i If the Bluetooth telephone list is already full, you will be requested to de-authorize a

116 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface T e le p h o n e

mobile phone (Y page 119). If COMAND

does not find your mobile phone, external

authorization (Y page 118) may be

necessary.

i If you call up the telephone list again, the unauthorized devices are removed from the

list. In this case, start a new search to

update the Bluetooth telephone list.

Authorizing (registering) a mobile

phone

Option 1: using the passkey (access code)

X In the Bluetooth telephones list, select the

not yet authorized mobile phone by turning

cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Authorize and pressW to confirm. The input menu for the passkey appears.

The passkey is any one to sixteen-digit

number combination which you can choose

yourself. You must enter the same number

combination in COMAND and in the

Bluetooth-capable mobile phone (see the

operating instructions of the mobile phone).

i Some mobile phones require a passkey with four or more digits.

If you want to reauthorize a mobile phone

following de-authorization, you can select a

different passkey.

i Mercedes-Benz recommends de- authorization in COMAND and on the

mobile phone. Subsequent authorization

may otherwise fail.

X To enter a passkey in COMAND: press

the number keys in turn.

is highlighted after the first number

has been entered.

or

X Select the digits in the digit bar one by one

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Then, select .

X To confirm an entry in COMAND: press

W the COMAND controller.

X Now enter the same passkey in the mobile

phone.

To make entries on the mobile phone: if

the Bluetooth connection is successful, you

will be requested to enter the passkey

(access code, code) (see the mobile phone

operating instructions).

X Enter the same passkey in the mobile

phone as already entered in COMAND.

i After entering the passkey, you may also need to enter a confirmation in your mobile

phone to connect calls. Please check your

mobile phone display.

If the COMAND display shows the

Authorization failed message, you

may have exceeded the prescribed time

period. Repeat the procedure.

The mobile phone is connected to COMAND

(authorized). You can now make calls using

the COMAND hands-free system.

Option 2: use Secure Simple Pairing

The mobile phone (or the Bluetooth audio

device) must support the Bluetooth version

2.1 for connection via Secure Simple Pairing.

COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is

displayed on the two devices that are to be

connected.

Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 117

T e le p h o n e

Z

X If the numeric code on both devices

matches, confirm Yes by pressingW.

If you select Yes, the authorization process

is completed and the mobile phone is

connected.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

X Confirm the message on the mobile phone.

External authorization

If COMAND does not detect your mobile

phone, this may be due to particular security

settings on your mobile phone. In this case,

you can test if your mobile phone can find

COMAND. The Bluetooth device name of

COMAND is MB Bluetooth.

Please note the following: some mobile

phones require that you establish the

connection to COMAND again once you have

entered the passkey (see the mobile phone

operating instructions). The mobile phone

cannot otherwise be authorized.

X Press the% function button on

COMAND.

X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu

by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.

X Select Update.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select External Authorization and

pressW to confirm.

X Start the Bluetooth search on the mobile

phone (see the mobile phone operating

instructions).

X Select COMAND (MB Bluetooth) on the

mobile phone.

X Option 1: when requested to do so, enter

the passkey first on the mobile phone and

then in COMAND.

X Option 2: confirm the displayed codes on

the mobile phone and in COMAND (Secure

Simple Pairing).

Connecting another mobile phone

If you have authorized more than one mobile

phone, you can switch between the individual

phones.

i You can only switch to another authorized phone if you are not currentlymaking a call.

X Select the mobile phone in the Bluetooth

telephones list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The selected mobile phone is searched for

and connected if it is within Bluetooth

range and if Bluetooth is activated.

Only one mobile phone can be connected

at any one time. The currently connected

mobile phone is indicated by the# dot in

the Bluetooth telephones list

(Y page 116).

118 Telephony via the Bluetooth interface T e le p h o n e

Displaying details

X Press the% function button on

COMAND.

X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu

by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.

X Select the desired mobile phone in the

Bluetooth telephones list.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The following information concerning the

selected mobile phone is shown:

RBluetooth name

RBluetooth address

Ravailability status (shown after a new

search)

Rauthorization status

X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.

De-registering (de-authorizing) a

mobile phone

i Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC recommends de-authorization on both COMAND and on

the mobile phone. Subsequent

authorization may otherwise fail.

X Press the% function button on

COMAND.

X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu

by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.

X Select the desired mobile phone in the

Bluetooth telephones list.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether you

really wish to de-authorize this device.

X Select Yes or No.

If you select Yes, the device will be deleted

from the Bluetooth telephones list.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

i Before re-authorizing the mobile phone, you should also delete the device name MB

Bluetooth from your mobile phone's

Bluetooth list.

Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth

interface)

X Press the% function button.

If the mobile phone is ready for use, the

following display appears:

Telephone basic menu (Bluetooth interface)

: Telephone status

; Signal strength of mobile phone network

= Receiver icon or

? To display call lists

A Character bar

B Bluetooth name of the currently

connected mobile phone

C To display the COMAND phone book

Telephony via the Bluetooth interface 119

T e le p h o n e

Z

i Display; may vary, depending on the

mobile phone connected.

Bars: display the current signal strength

of the mobile phone network. If all bars are

filled, you have optimum reception.

If no bars are shown, reception is either

very poor or there is none at all.

Receiver icon= shows whether a call is

active/being connected or not.

Text message (SMS) display in

telephone basic menu

The Text Message menu item is available if

the Bluetooth telephone supports the MAP

Bluetooth profile (Message Access Profile)

and the text message has been downloaded

from the Bluetooth telephone. The menu

item is otherwise grayed out and is not

available.

The1mail icon is displayed when you have

an unread text message. The symbol

disappears once you have read the text

message. The mail symbol is displayed

when the text message memory is full. The

symbol disappears once you delete at least

one text message.

Further information can be found in the "Text

messages (SMS)" section (Y page 133).

Reception and transmission volume

Once the mobile phone has been authorized,

you can optimize the transmission and

reception volume settings. Find information

on the optimal setting for your mobile phone

on the Internet at

http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call

the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or Customer

Relations at 1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

i Incorrect settings may have a significant impact on the quality of calls.

X Press the% function button.

X Select Phone in the telephone basic menu

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Bluetooth Phones and pressW to confirm.

X Select an authorized mobile phone from

the list by turning cVd.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Reception Volume or

Transmission Volume and pressW to confirm.

: Scale with indicator showing current

volume

X Select a volume setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X To close the setting scale: pressW or slide XVY.

Telephone operation

Incoming call

Rejecting or accepting a call

When there is an incoming call, you see a

corresponding window in the display.

120 Telephone operation T e le p h o n e

X To reject: select Reject by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the~ button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

X To accept: confirm Accept by pressing

W.

or

X Press the6 button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

Multifunction display (example)

i You can also accept the call by voice command using the Voice Control System

(see the separate operating instructions).

Once you have accepted the call, you can use

hands-free mode. The call volume can be

adjusted (Y page 34). For more information,

see the "Functions during a single call

connection" section (Y page 122).

The display shows the phone number or the

nameandphone number (if the entry is stored

in the address book) or shows the Unknown

(phone number withheld) message.

i You can also accept a call as described above when another main function is

switched on in COMAND. Once you have

accepted the call, the display switches to

telephone mode. After the call is finished,

you see the display of the previous main

application again.

The display does not switch to telephone

mode if you:

Rhide the window with the% button

next to the COMAND controller and then

Raccept the call with the; button on

the multifunction steering wheel

Making a call

Entering a telephone number using the

number keypad

X Call up the telephone basic menu

(Y page 119).

X Enter the digits using the number keypad.

X To connect a call: press the6 button

on COMAND or on the multifunction

steering wheel.

Entering a telephone number using the

telephone basic menu

X Call up the telephone basic menu

(Y page 119).

X Select the digits one by one by turning

cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To connect a call: select in the

character bar and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the6 button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

Telephone operation 121

T e le p h o n e

Z

Redialing

On COMAND

X Call up the telephone basic menu

(Y page 119).

X Select in the character bar and press

W to confirm.

or

X If the telephone basic menu is displayed,

press the6 button in COMAND.

In both cases, the calls dialed list appears.

The most recently dialed number is at the

top.

X To select a call: turn cVd the COMAND controller.

X To connect the call: pressW the COMAND controller.

Connecting a call to an entry in a call list

or in the COMAND phone book

X Open a call list and select an entry

(Y page 129).

or

X Call up the COMAND phone book and

select an entry (Y page 126).

X To connect a call: pressW the COMAND controller or the6 button.

Making a call via speed dial

The speed dial list contains stored phone

book entries (Y page 131).

Option 1:

X Hold down one of the number keys for

longer than two seconds.

Option 2:

X Call up the telephone basic menu

(Y page 119).

X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

X Select the storage location and pressW to confirm.

Irrespective of the option chosen, the

telephone basic menu appears and

displays the selected entry. This initiates

dialing.

Functions available during a call

Overview

Telephone operation with a single call

: Person you are calling

; Icon for active telephone connection

= To switch hands-free microphone on/off

? To send DTMF tones (not possible with all

mobile phones)

A To end a call

The following functions:

Raccepting a waiting call

Rmaking a further call

Rcall waiting

are available if they are supported by the

network (only possible with a GSM network)

and your Bluetooth mobile phone.

122 Telephone operation T e le p h o n e

Switching the hands-free microphone

on/off

This function is also available during an active

phone call.

X Call up the telephone basic menu

(Y page 119).

X To switch off: select Mike Off and press

W to confirm. If the microphone is switched off, the

display shows theQ icon and the The

microphone is offmessage appears for

a short period.

X To switch on: select Mike On and press

W to confirm. TheQ symbol disappears. You will briefly

see the The microphone is onmessage.

Ending an active call

X Select in the telephone basicmenu and

pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the~ button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

The call on hold is activated.

Rejecting or accepting a waiting call

The call waiting function must be supported

by the mobile phone network provider and be

enabled. Depending on the mobile phone

used, the system behavior differs when

accepting a call (option 1 and 2).

If you have a call in progress and receive

another call, a new window appears in the

display. You also hear a tone. You can accept

or reject the call.

X To reject: select Reject and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the~ button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

X To accept: select Accept and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the6 button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

Option 1: if you accept the waiting call, the

active call is ended.

The active call will also be ended if you

accept the waiting call using the Voice

Control System (see the separate

operating instructions).

Option 2: if you accept the waiting call, the

active call is put on hold. You can then

switch back and forth between both calls

(toggling) (Y page 124).

i The second option is available if your mobile phone supports the toggling

function (via Bluetooth).

Valid for both options: if you accept the

waiting call using themobile phone, the active

call is put on hold. You then have two calls.

The call you have just accepted is active.

The COMAND display changes. If you

continue to operate functions on the mobile

phone, the COMAND display may differ from

that of the mobile phone.

Making a further call

You can make a second call while on the

phone with someone else. This action puts

the previous call on hold. The function is

available if your mobile phone supports this

function via Bluetooth.

: Symbol for making a second call

Telephone operation 123

T e le p h o n e

Z

X Select symbol: by turning cVd the

COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the; button on COMAND.

X Enter the phone number:

Rmanually (Y page 121)

Rusing the phone book (Y page 125)

Rfrom the call lists (Y page 129)

Rusing speed dial (Y page 122)

Call waiting

You can switch back and forth between calls

with this function. The function is available if

your mobile phone supports the toggling

function (via Bluetooth).

You can use the function if you are answering

a second call or making a second call.

Switching between the active call and the

call on hold

: Active call

; Call on hold

X Confirm symbol; by pressingW.

or

X Press the; button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

The previous call on hold is activated.

Ends an active call

X Select in the telephone basicmenu and

pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the~ button on COMAND or on

the multifunction steering wheel.

The call on hold is activated.

Conference call

You can interconnect calls (active and on

hold) on the mobile phone. This permits

several parties to hear one another and speak

with one another.

You can also make a further call in COMAND

(Y page 123).

Sending DTMF tones

This function is not supported by all mobile

phones.

Answering machines or other devices can be

controlled by DTMF tones, e.g. for remote

query functions.

X If you would like to listen to the messages

on your answering machine, for example,

select the corresponding number.

X To transmit individual characters: once

a connection has been established to the

answering machine, select the desired

characters in the character bar and press

W to confirm.

or

X Press the corresponding key on the

COMAND number keypad.

Every character selected will be

transmitted immediately.

X To send a phone book entry as a DTMF

sequence: select Name by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select the desired phone book entry and

pressW to confirm. The entry is sent as a DTMF character

string.

124 Telephone operation T e le p h o n e

X To return to the call display: select

Back and pressW to confirm.

i You can also send DTMF tones using the Voice Control System (see the separate

operating instructions).

Using the phone book

Introduction

The phone book displays the names and

phone numbers of all of the address book

entries saved in the COMAND address book.

If an address book entry does not have a

telephone number, it does not appear in the

phone book.

You can store telephone numbers in the

phone book or import contacts. The phone

book of the mobile phone is automatically

downloaded to COMAND after connection.

You can import contacts from the memory

card and the USB device into the phone book,

or receive vCards via Bluetooth.

The functions:

Rimporting contacts

Rreceiving vCards

Rdeleting contacts

are described in detail in the "Address

book" section (Y page 141).

i The stored phone book and the vCards remain in COMAND, even if you use

COMAND with another mobile phone. The

entries can be viewed without a mobile

phone. For this reason, delete the phone

book before selling or transferring

ownership of your vehicle.

Calling up the phone book

Overview

X Select Name in the telephone basic menu

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If the phone book contains entries, they will

be displayed in alphabetical order.

Character bar= is active.

The character bar is used for fast selection

of an entry.

X To close the phone book: select& in

the character bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

or

X Press the% button.

Using the phone book 125

T e le p h o n e

Z

Symbol overview

Icon Explanation

Address book entry that has been entered or changed via COMAND

Imported contact that has been saved in the phone or address book

\ Address book entry with voice tag

i These entries have also been assigned a voice tag. Voice tags are available in vehicles with the Voice Control System (see the separate operating

instructions).

Contact that has been imported from a mobile phone that supports PBAP

Entry that has been imported from the memory card or USB device

Entry imported via the Bluetooth interface

Searching for a phone book entry

Using the character bar

You determine the first letter of the entry you

are looking for with the first character you

enter.

X Select a character by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The first entry in the list that starts with the

letter selected is highlighted. If there are

similar entries, the next different character

is shown. For example, with entries such as

Christel and Christine, the beginnings

of the names are similar. In this case, you

will be offered a choice between E and I.

X Select the characters of the entry you are

searching for one by one and pressW to confirm.

When the selection is clear, COMAND

switches automatically to the selection list.

X To complete the search: switch from the

phone book with the character bar to the

selection list (Y page 127).

The last list entry is automatically

highlighted.

Using the number keypad

Alternatively, you can also enter digits using

the number keypad (direct entry)

(Y page 29).

Deleting characters

X To delete an individual character: select

the2 symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW briefly.

or

X Briefly press the2 button

Each time a character is deleted, the entry

most closely resembling the remaining

characters is shown at the top of the list.

X To delete an entry: select the2 symbol by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW until the entry is deleted.

or

X Press and hold the2 button until the

entire entry is deleted.

Changing the language of the character

bar

X SelectB and pressW.

X Select the desired language.

126 Using the phone book T e le p h o n e

Changing the character set of the

character bar

X Selectp and pressW to confirm. The character set changes each time you

make this selection.

Selecting an entry directly from the list

You can switch to the list at any time during

character entry.

X SlideVZ the COMAND controller repeatedly or press and holdW until the character bar disappears.

or

X Select and pressW to confirm.

X To select an entry: turn cVd the COMAND controller until the desired entry

is highlighted and pressW to confirm.

To select a phone number: theG icon indicates that an entry contains more than

one phone number.

X Select a phone book entry with theG icon and pressW to confirm. The sub-entries appear. TheG icon changes toI.

Phone book entry with several entries

X Select a sub-entry by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.

X To return to the phone book using the

character bar: select& in the list and

pressW to confirm.

or

X Press the% back button.

Displaying details for an entry

X Select an entry in the selection list by

turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed view appears.

X To close the detailed view: slide XVY repeatedly until the entry is highlighted

again or press the% back button.

Deleting an entry from the phone

book

If the entry contains only phone numbers, it

is deleted from the phone book and address

book.

If there is additional data included along with

the phone number, e.g. a navigable

destination, the entry is deleted from the

phone book but retained in the address book.

X Select an entry in the selection list by

turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A prompt appears asking whether the entry

should be deleted.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the entry is deleted in

accordancewith the rules described above.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Using the phone book 127

T e le p h o n e

Z

Creating a new entry in the phone

book

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller repeatedly in the phone book until the

selection list appears.

X Select the list symbol on the right in the

selection list by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select New entry and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the number, e.g.

Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g.

Mobile, and pressW to confirm.

X Select Cont. and pressW to confirm. The input menu with data fields appears.

: Selected data field with cursor

; Character bar

X Enter characters and save the entry.

Proceed as described under character

entry in the "At a glance" section

(Y page 28).

i The entry is created in the phone book and in the address book.

Adding telephone numbers to an

existing phone book entry

X Select an entry in the selection list by

turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the number, e.g.

Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g.

Mobile, and pressW to confirm.

X Select Continue and pressW to confirm. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer

than five numbers assigned to the entry you

are searching for in the selected number

category.

If five numbers are stored for the entry in

the selected number category, a prompt

will appear asking whether you wish to

overwrite one of the existing numbers.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, a selection list will appear

containing the five existing numbers.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

X Select the number to be overwritten by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears. The data field for

entering the new phone number is

highlighted.

X Enter characters and save the entry.

Proceed as described under character

entry in the "At a glance" section

(Y page 28).

128 Using the phone book T e le p h o n e

Using call lists

Introduction

COMAND displays lists of calls received

(including missed calls) and made during

phone operation. Call lists are not available

unless a mobile phone is connected to

COMAND.

COMAND supports the PBAP Bluetooth

profile. How COMAND processes call lists

depends on the model of the mobile phone

connected:

RBluetooth telephone with PBAP

Bluetooth profile:

The call lists are downloaded automatically

from the mobile phone by COMAND as

soon as the mobile phone is connected to

COMAND.

RBluetooth telephone without PBAP

Bluetooth profile:

COMAND creates the call lists from calls

dialed and received (includingmissed calls)

as soon as the mobile phone is connected

with COMAND.

i For Bluetooth telephones without the

PBAP Bluetooth profile, the call lists in

COMAND are not synchronized with those

on your mobile phone. These calls may or

may not be listed on your mobile phone,

depending on the model.

i If no mobile phone is connected, then the Call Lists menu item is grayed out and

cannot be selected. If you connect amobile

phone other than the previous one to

COMAND, the previously available call lists

and their entries will be deleted

automatically. They are still available on the

mobile phone itself.

i The respective menu item can only be selected if calls have already been made or

received in COMAND.

Displaying missed calls in the COMAND

display is not supported by all mobile

phones.

Opening the call list and selecting an

entry

X Press the% function button.

X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic

menu by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

A menu appears.

X Select Calls Received or Calls

Dialed using cVd and pressW to confirm.

The corresponding list appears.

List of selected phone numbers (example)

: To close the list

; Date/time (if available), symbols (if

assigned) and telephone number of the

entry highlighted

= To call up options

i You can also call up the list of dialed calls by pressing the6 button when the

telephone basic menu is shown. In this

case, the list will only show phone

numbers.

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X To dial a phone number: pressW.

X To close the list: select Back and press

W to confirm or press the% button.

Using call lists 129

T e le p h o n e

Z

Displaying details about a list entry

COMANDcan also showa shortened list entry

in full.

X Select a list entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed display appears.

X To go back to the list: slide XVY repeatedly until the list is highlighted.

Storing a phone number which has

not yet been stored

Introduction

For incoming calls from a person who is not

in the address book, COMAND displays the

phone number in the call list. You can save

this entry.

Storing as a new entry in the address

book

X Open a call list and select an entry

(Y page 129).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm.

i Save is shown in gray if the selected list entry has already been saved in the address

book.

X Select New Entry and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the number, e.g.

Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g.

Mobile Phone, and pressW to confirm.

Number category Display (phone

book and address

book)

Not Classified No symbol

Home

Work

Phone category Display (phone

book and address

book)

Not classified ;

Mobile Phone

Car

Pager

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. An input menu with data fields is shown.

The data field for the telephone number is

filled in automatically.

: Data field with cursor

; Telephone number and symbol for the

phone category (automatically entered)

= Character bar

X Proceed as described under "Entering

characters" in the "Entering characters in

the address and phone books" section

(Y page 31).

130 Using call lists T e le p h o n e

Adding a phone number to an address

book entry

X Open a call list and select an entry

(Y page 129).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm.

i Save is shown in gray if the selected list entry has already been saved.

X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the number, e.g.

Home, and pressW to confirm.

X Select a category for the phone, e.g.

Mobile Phone, and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save.

The search menu for address book entries

appears.

X Search for the desired entry. Proceed as

described under "Searching for a phone

book entry" (Y page 126).

X PressWwhen you have finished searching. COMAND stores the data if there are fewer

than five numbers assigned to the entry you

are searching for in the selected number

category.

You will see a message to this effect.

If five numbers are stored for the entry you

are searching for, a prompt will appear

asking whether you wish to overwrite one

of the existing numbers.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, a selection list with the

five existing numbers is displayed.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

X Select the number to be overwritten in the

list by turningcVd theCOMANDcontroller and pressW to confirm. COMAND overwrites the selected number

with the new data.

Deleting call lists

This function is available when COMAND

creates and manages the call lists.

This is the case if you use a Bluetooth

telephone without the support of the PBAP

Bluetooth profile.

i If you delete the call lists from the mobile phone (separate mobile phone operating

instructions), COMANDupdates the call list

display the next time it connects. The call

lists are empty in the case described.

X Select Call Lists in the telephone basic

menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete Call Lists and pressW to confirm.

A prompt appears asking whether you wish

to delete all call lists.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the call lists are deleted.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Using the speed dial list

Storing a phone book entry in the

speed dial list

You can assign ten speed dial presets (0 9)

to the speed dial list. There are two options

available for this purpose.

Option 1:

X Search for a phone book entry in the phone

book (Y page 126).

X If an entry has several phone numbers,

select the desired number by turning

cVd the COMAND controller.

Using the speed dial list 131

T e le p h o n e

Z

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Speed dial by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

A menu appears.

Speed dial menu

X Confirm Assign Speed Dial Preset by

pressingW. The speed dial list appears. The selected

phone book entry is listed as the first entry.

The next available speed dial preset is

highlighted.

X Select the speed dial preset by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The phone book entry is saved in the speed

dial preset.

Option 2

X Call up the telephone basic menu; see

(Y page 119)

X Select Call Lists by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Speed Dial Preset List and

pressW to confirm. The speed dial list appears.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Assign Speed Dial Preset by

pressingW.

X Proceed as described under option 1.

Making a call via speed dial

A description can be found in the "Making a

call" section (Y page 122).

Deleting a speed dial number

X To delete a speed dial number: select

Delete Speed Dial Preset in the

"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The speed dial number is deleted.

X To delete all speed dial numbers: select

Delete All Speed Dial Presets in the

"Speed dial" menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

You will be asked whether you want to

continue.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, all speed dial numberswill

be deleted from the speed dial list.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

132 Using the speed dial list T e le p h o n e

Text message (SMS)

Information and requirements

The functions can be used if the Bluetooth

mobile phone supports the MAP (Message

Access Profile) Bluetooth profile.

When the mobile phone is connected, the 30

most recent text messages which are

currently stored on the phone are loaded to

the COMAND's text message inbox and

displayed.

i COMAND may not load all the most recent text messages:

This is possible in exceptional cases, such

as with certain mobile phones, or when

there are a lot of text messages in the

phone's inbox.

If the above conditions are fulfilled, new

incoming text messages appear in the

COMAND text message inbox. In addition, a

tone sounds and the/ icon appears. The

symbol disappears once you have read the

text message. The mail symbol is

displayed when the text message memory is

full. The symbol disappears once you delete

at least one text message.

Displaying the text message (SMS)

inbox

Overview

X Press the% function button.

X Select Text Message in the telephone

basic menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The text message inbox appears.

Text message (SMS) inbox

The shortened text or sender of the selected

text message (depending on the settings) as

well as the date and time at which the

selected text message was received are

displayed at the top and in the middle. The

0 symbol appears if a text message has

not yet been read.

Reading a text message (SMS)

X Select a text message in the text message

inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The text message appears.

X To scroll through the display or select

phone numbers in a text message: turn

cVd the COMAND controller. The display scrolls up or down line by line,

or skips to the next or previous telephone

number and automatically highlights it.

X To return to the list: pressW and select

Back.

Listening to a text message

You can set the language (Y page 45) and the

speed of the read-aloud function

(Y page 42).

X PressW while a text message is being

displayed, select Read Aloud and press

W to confirm. COMAND reads out the text message.

Text message (SMS) 133

T e le p h o n e

Z

X To cancel the read-aloud function: press

the8 button.

or

X PressW, select Cancel Read-Aloud

Function and pressW to confirm.

Switching the display

You can switch between displaying the text

message sender or the textmessage content.

The sender display shows the sender of the

text message. If the sender is stored in the

COMAND phone book, the name is displayed.

The text display shows the first few words of

a text message.

X Select a text message in the text message

inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X To switch to the text display: select the

list symbol to the right of the text message

by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display Text and pressW to confirm.

The view changes.

X To switch to the sender display: select

the list symbol to the right of the text

message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display Sender and pressW to confirm.

The view changes.

Displaying details and phone numbers

COMAND can also show a shortened sender

display in full.

X Select a text message in the text message

inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the text

message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The detailed display appears.

X To close the detailed view: slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Returning to the telephone basic menu

X Press the% back button.

Managing text messages

Calling a text message (SMS) sender

X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.

X Select Call Sender and pressW to confirm.

The telephonemakes the call to the sender.

Using phone numbers in the text

You can use numbers that are red and

underlined in text messages (SMS).

i It is possible that a highlighted numerical sequence may not contain a telephone

number.

X Select a usable number when the text

message is displayed.

: Usable numerical sequence

X PressW the COMAND controller and

select Use.

X Select Call.

The telephone makes the call.

134 Text message (SMS) T e le p h o n e

i You can use the "New entry" or "Add no." functions to save this telephone number or

to add it to an existing entry.

Storing the sender as a new address

book entry

This function is not possible if the senders

telephone number is already stored in the

address book.

X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.

X Select Save Number and pressW to confirm.

X Select New entry and pressW to confirm.

X Proceed as described in the "Storing as a

new entry in the address book" section

(Y page 130).

Storing a text message sender in an

existing address book entry

X PressW the COMAND controller while the text message is being displayed.

X Select Save Number and pressW to confirm.

X Select Add Phone No. and pressW to confirm.

X Proceed from the step "Select a number

category" in the "Adding telephone

numbers to an existing phone book entry"

section (Y page 128).

Deleting a text message (SMS)

X Select a text message in the text message

inbox by turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the text

message by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A deletion prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the text message is

deleted.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

i This delete function is not supported by all mobile phones. The Deletion

Procedure Failed message appears.

Using the address book

Introduction

G WARNING

Please devote your attention first and

foremost to the traffic situation you are in.

Before your journey, please familiarize

yourself with the address book functions.

Only use the COMAND when road and traffic

conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise you

could be involved in an accident in which you

or others could be injured.

The address book organizes and stores

entries which are entered from different

sources (mobile phone, memory card, USB

device, COMAND telephone book, navigation

system).

You can use these entries to make telephone

calls and for navigation.

i Number of contacts in the address book: the address book can store a total of

4000 contacts. 1500 entries are reserved

in the address book for mobile phone

contacts and 1500 for contacts you create

in COMAND or import from other sources.

The remaining 1000 entries are assigned

by COMAND as necessary.

i Display of mobile phone contacts: contacts downloaded from the mobile

phone remain in the address book even if

the mobile phone is disconnected from

COMAND. This means that contacts which

have previously been available can be

displayed as soon as the mobile phone is

reconnected. The contacts are downloaded

again so that any new contacts that have

been added to the mobile phone can be

displayed.

Using the address book 135

T e le p h o n e

Z

When a new mobile phone is connected to

COMAND, all the contacts from the

previousmobile phone are deleted from the

address book.

If a mobile phone is not (yet) connected to

COMAND, the contacts from that mobile

phonewill not (yet) be shown in the address

book.

Address book entries remain stored when

the mobile phone is disconnected.

Therefore, you should delete your personal

data using the reset function before selling

your vehicle, for example (Y page 47).

Calling up the address book

Option 1:

X Press the% function button.

You see the telephone basic menu or the

address book if it was open previously.

X When the telephone basic menu is

displayed, press the% function button

again.

Option 2:

X With the telephone basic menu shown,

select Phone by slidingVZ the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Address Book from the menu and

pressW to confirm.

Address book with address book entry and

navigable data

i An address book entry can contain the following information: surname, first name,

company, two addresses, geo-coordinates

and up to five telephone numbers.

X To browse in the address book: turn

cVd the COMAND controller.

X To close the address book: press the

% button.

Searching for an address book entry

X Call up the address book (Y page 136).

X Select Search in the address book by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If there are more than eight entries, the

searchmenu and the character bar appear.

Search menu with character bar

: Symbol for address book entry

; Symbol for complete address data

from the navigation system

= Character bar

? d Symbol for phone book entry from the mobile phone

A Entry with voice tag

Additional symbols are described in the

"Symbol overview" section (Y page 126).

X Proceed as described under "Searching for

a phone book entry" (Y page 126).

136 Using the address book T e le p h o n e

Creating a new entry in the address

book

You can enter address data directly into the

address book. If you store telephone

numbers in the COMAND phone book, these

are also saved in the address book. If you

store a navigation destination, COMAND

creates an address book entry which includes

the complete navigable address data.

X Call up the address book (Y page 136).

X Select New in the address book by sliding

V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu with data fields appears.

Input menu with data fields

: Selected data field with cursor

; Character bar

X Enter characters and save the entry.

Proceed as described under "Entering

characters" in the "Entering characters in

the address and phone books" section

(Y page 31).

Deleting an address book entry

X Option 1: select Delete by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Option 2: search for an address book entry

(Y page 136).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, a prompt

will appear.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the entry will be deleted.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

Displaying the detailed view for an

address book entry

Selecting an entry

X Search for an address book entry and turn

cVd the COMAND controller to select it in the selection list (Y page 136).

or

X Select an address book entry by browsing

(Y page 136).

X In both cases, pressW. The detailed view appears.

Detailed display for business details

: Returns to the previous menu

; \ Symbol for business details

= Calls up options

Using the address book 137

T e le p h o n e

Z

Starting route guidance to an address

X Select the address data field by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The route to the destination address is

calculated and route guidance starts

(Y page 57).

Calling a telephone number

X Select the phone number data field by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. This initiates dialing and you can thenmake

your call (Y page 122).

Showing the details of an address book

entry

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The display is shown in full.

X To close the detailed display: press the

% button.

Changing an address book entry

Changing an entry

X Option 1: search for an address book entry

and turn cVd the COMAND controller to select it in the selection list (Y page 136).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Edit and pressW to confirm.

X Option 2: call up the detailed view for an

address book entry (Y page 137).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Edit and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option, the input menu

containing data fields appears.

X Proceed as described under "Entering

characters" in the "Entering characters in

the address and phone books" section

(Y page 31).

Changing the category of a telephone

number data field

X Display the detailed view for an address

book entry (Y page 137) and highlight the

telephone number data field.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Change Category and pressW to confirm.

X Select a number category, e.g. Home.

X Select a telephone category, e.g. Mobile.

X If desired, select Preferred and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the previous status, you

switch the option onO or off. The phone number is displayed as the first

138 Using the address book T e le p h o n e

number in the phone book and can be

dialed immediately.

X Select Save and pressW to confirm. The new category is stored.

Calling a number stored in an entry

Conditions

The mobile phone must be connected via the

Bluetooth interface.

Option 1

X Display details for an address book entry

(Y page 137).

X Select the phone number data field by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The telephone makes the call. The display

switches to telephone mode.

Option 2

X Display details for an address book entry.

X Select the phone number data field by

turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

data field by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Call and pressW to confirm. The telephone makes the call.

Storing the phone number as a speed

dial number

X Display details for an address book entry.

X Select the phone number data field by

turning cVd the COMAND controller.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

data field by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Speed Dial and pressW to confirm.

You can now store the number in one of the

ten speed dial presets.

Starting route guidance to an entry

Note

This function is available as soon as you have

stored a destination in the destination

memory (Y page 95). COMAND also saves

destinations in the address book together

with all the data required for route guidance.

Option 1

X Search for an address book entry

(Y page 136) with theL icon and select it from the list.

X Display details for an address book entry

(Y page 138).

X Select the address data field by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Option 2

X Search for an address book entry

(Y page 136) with theL icon and select it from the list.

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Navigate and pressW to confirm. Irrespective of the option chosen, route

guidance starts.

Option 3

Route guidance can also be started for an

address book entry without the symbol. If

the address data or designations do not

Using the address book 139

T e le p h o n e

Z

match the digital map, COMANDprompts you

to re-enter the address.

i It is best then to store the new address under the address book entry. This will

provide youwith an address book entry that

is suitable for navigation.

X Enter the destination address (Y page 54).

X Select Save from the address entry menu

and pressW to confirm.

X Assigning a destination to an address book

entry (Y page 96).

Voice tags

Adding or changing a voice tag

You can enter voice tags via the Voice Control

System (see the separate operating

instructions). Once you have assigned a voice

tag to an address book entry, you can call up

this entry with a voice command and dial a

phone number, for example. You can add one

voice tag per address book entry.

X Search for an address book entry with or

without a voice tag ( symbol)

(Y page 136).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Name and pressW to confirm.

X Select Add or Change and pressW to confirm.

Subsequent operation is voice-controlled.

The Voice Control System guides you

through the dialogs.

Deleting a voice tag

X Search for an address book entry with a

voice tag (Y page 136).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Name and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm. A deletion prompt appears.

X Select Yes or No and press the9 button to confirm.

If you select Yes, COMAND deletes the

voice tag.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Listening to a voice tag

X Search for an address book entry with a

voice tag (Y page 136).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Voice Name and pressW to confirm.

X Select Listen and pressW to confirm. You hear the voice tag.

Storing a phone book entry from the

mobile phone in the address book

Using this function you can save imported

phone book entries in the address book.

The following can be used as a source:

Rthe mobile phone

Rthe memory card

Rthe USB device

Rthe Bluetooth Interface

Imported phone book entries are indicated in

the phone book by different icons

(Y page 126).

140 Using the address book T e le p h o n e

X Search for an entry in the phone book on

the mobile phoned (Y page 126).

X Select the list symbol to the right of the

entry by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Save Entry and pressW to confirm.

The Saving Procedure Successful

message appears. The phone book entry is

now saved as an address book entry.

Thed icon is replaced by the icon.

Importing contacts

Information and requirements

You can import contacts (vCards) from the

memory card and a USB device into the

address book, or receive vCards via

Bluetooth.

i Up to 2500 entries can be imported into the address book. A message notifies you

when the maximum number is reached.

You now have to delete existing entries

(Y page 137) in order to import new entries.

Depending on the source of the contact data,

different requirements apply:

Source Conditions

Memory card The SD memory card must

be inserted (Y page 157)

and must contain

importable contact data.

USB device The USB device must be

inserted in the USB port

and must contain

importable contact data.

Requirements for receiving vCards via

Bluetooth

You can receive vCards from devices (e.g.

from a PC) which support the sending of

vCards via Bluetooth.

It is not necessary to authorize the device in

COMAND to do so.

Please bear the following in mind:

RBluetooth must be activated in COMAND

and on the Bluetooth device (see

operating instructions for the device).

Rthe Bluetooth devicemust be able to send

vCards via Bluetooth (see operating

instructions for the device).

Rthe Bluetooth device in the vehicle must

be switched on.

Importing from thememory card orUSB

device

Entries imported from the memory card or

from a USB device have the symbol.

The following conditions must be fulfilled in

order to import vCards:

RvCards (vcf files)may be located in themain

directory or in folders. COMAND allows for

a targeted selection of the corresponding

directories.

RvCards must have the file extension ".vcf".

i A vcf file can also contain several vCards.

COMAND supports vCards in versions 2.1

and 3.0.

X Select Address Book in the address book

or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,

select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select Download Contacts and pressW to confirm.

A menu appears.

X Select From The Memory Card or From

USB Device in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Add or Overwrite and pressW to confirm.

Add imports the entries from the memory

card or USB device into the address book.

Using the address book 141

T e le p h o n e

Z

Overwrite imports the entries from the

memory card or USB device and overwrites

all entries in the address book with the

symbol. The previous entries are then

no longer available.

After the contact data has been imported

successfully, you will see a message to this

effect. The address book or the respective

telephone basic menu is displayed.

i You can select the Overwritemenu item if the address book already contains

corresponding entries. A message notifies

you when the address book is full.

Receiving vCards via Bluetooth

Received vCards are identified by the

symbol in the address book.

i If you switch to another main function, e.g. navigation, while receiving vCards, the

reception of vCards will be terminated.

X Select Address Book in the address book

or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,

select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Download Contacts and pressW to confirm.

X Select Received Business Cards in the

menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

This interrupts the Bluetooth connection

between COMAND and your active mobile

phone. COMAND is, however, ready to

receive vCards from another Bluetooth

device (PC, mobile phone).

X Start the data transfer on the external

Bluetooth device (see the operating

instructions for the device).

The number of vCards received is

displayed.

X To end reception: pressW or the% back button.

COMAND then reconnects with the mobile

phone.

Deleting contacts

X Select Address Book in the address book

or, if the telephone basic menu is shown,

select Phone by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Delete Contacts and pressW to confirm.

X Select one of the following options:

RInternal Contacts

RContacts From Storage Device

RReceived Business Cards

RDelete All

A prompt corresponding to your selection

appears.

X Select Yes or No and pressW to confirm.

If you select Yes, the contacts are deleted

according to your selection.

If you select No, the process will be

canceled.

142 Using the address book T e le p h o n e

COMAND features ............................. 144

Radio mode ........................................ 144

Satellite radio .................................... 148

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........ 154

Music search ..................................... 165

MUSIC REGISTER .............................. 168

Bluetooth audio mode .................... 172

Media Interface mode ...................... 178

Audio AUX mode ............................... 182

143

A u d io

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

Radio mode

General information

i Portable electronic devices in the vehicle may seriously impair radio reception.

Switching to radio mode

Option 1

X Press$ the function button.

The radio display appears. You will hear the

last station played on the last waveband.

i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches between the FM, AM and WB

wavebands in that order and then calls up

SatRadio mode. Pressing the button again

takes you back to FM radio mode.

Option 2

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If radio mode was the last mode selected,

it will now be active.

If another audio mode is switched on, you

can now switch to radio mode in the audio

menu.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

Example: audio menu

: Current audio operating mode

; Main function bar

= Audio menu

X Select FM/AM Radio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Example: HD Radio display

: Display window with station settings

; Preset position of the selected station

= Name of the selected station (icon for HD

Radio and number of subprogram)

? Frequency of the selected station

A Sound settings

B FM radio, AM radio or WB radio

C Program information

D Preset functions

E Radio functions

144 Radio mode A u d io

Notes on HD Radio

i The functions of HD Radio include:

Rdigital transmission in the same

wavebands as analog AM/FM. The

analog AM/FM stations remain in the

same position when selecting a station.

Rthe ability to broadcast several program

streams over a single FM frequency (e.g.

HD1, HD2 etc.).

Rinterference-free, clear reception.

RFM: sound in CD quality; AM: sound as

on analog FM stations.

Rtext-based information (e.g. artist, track

name) in the display.

For further information on HD Radio, visit

http://www.hdradio.com.

You can deactivate HD Radio for the

selected frequency in the radio submenu.

X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding

V the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select HD Radio and pressW to confirm. HD Radio is deactivated if the check box is empty.

You hear the analog program of this

frequency.

As soon as you change to another HDRadio

frequency, the HD Radio is reactivated.

Switching wavebands

Option 1

You can switch the radio between the FM, AM

and WB waveband.

X Press the$ function button repeatedly

until the desired waveband is selected.

i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches between the FM, AM and WB

wavebands in that order and then calls up

SatRadio mode. Pressing the button again

takes you back to FM radio mode.

Option 2

X Select FM, AM or WB in the radio display by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Waveband submenu is opened.

1 Waveband submenu

The# dot shows the currently selected waveband.

X Select awaveband and pressW to confirm. You will hear the last station played on the

selected waveband.

Radio mode 145

A u d io

Selecting a station

Selecting a station using the station

search function

X Press theE orF button.

or

X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/selection

window in the radio display is active.

Station search scans up or down and stops

at the next station found.

Selecting stations via the station

presets

X Quick setting: press a number key, e.g.

l.

X Directly in the station presets: select

Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X PressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.

The station preset memory appears. The

# dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored.

X Select a station by turning cVd and pressingW to confirm or press a number key, e.g.l.

Selecting stations by entering the

frequency manually

X Option 1: press thel button.

X Option 2: select Radio in the radio display

by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Enter Frequency and pressW to confirm.

Irrespective of the option chosen, an input

menu will appear.

X Enter a frequency using the number keys.

COMAND tunes in to the frequency

entered.

Waveband Frequency

AM (MF) 530 1700 kHz

FM (VHF) 87.7 107.9 MHz

WB (Weather Band) Weather report

channels

i You can only enter currently permitted numbers.

i If you enter a frequency in the FM or AM wavebands which is outside the frequency

range, COMAND tunes in to the next lower

frequency.

Storing stations

Storing stations manually

There are ten presets available for the FM and

AM wavebands.

X Quick save: press and hold a number key,

e.g.l, until you hear a tone.

The station is stored.

X Directly in the station presets: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/

selection window is active.

or

X Select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. In both cases, the station presets appear.

The# dot indicates under which preset the currently selected station is stored.

146 Radio mode A u d io

Station memory (example)

X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold

W until you hear a tone. The station is stored under the preset.

Storing stations automatically

This function automatically stores stations

with adequate reception under the presets.

The search starts at the lowest frequency.

COMAND stores any stations found,

beginning with preset 1. The storing process

ends once the highest frequency has been

reached or once ten stations have been

found. Any stations stored manually under

the presets will be lost. COMAND may not

occupy all memory slots when storing.

X Option 1: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is

active.

The station preset memory appears.

X Option 2: select Presets by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The station preset memory appears.

X Irrespective of the option, select

Autostore and pressW to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for

stations that can be received. You will see

a message to this effect. The available

stations are automatically stored in the

preset positions.

X To cancel storing: select Cancel and

pressW to confirm.

Weather Band

Switching on

X Press the$ function button repeatedly

until the Weather Band is switched on.

or

X Select the currently set waveband FM or

AM by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select WB from the menu and pressW to confirm.

Searching for a channel

X Quick select: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/

selection window is active.

or

X Press theE orF button.

Channel search scans up or down and

stops at the next channel found.

Selecting a channel from the channel

list

X Select Channel by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel list appears.

Radio mode 147

A u d io

X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press a number key on the control panel,

e.g. 4, at any time.

Displaying station information

This function is only available for analog FM

programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD

Radio).

Information relevant to the current station is

shown below the main function bar.

X Select Radio in the radio display by sliding

V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Show Station Information by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Depending on the previous status, you

switch Show Station Information on

O or off.

Displaying program information

This function is only available for analog FM

programs and digital AM/FM programs (HD

Radio).

Information relevant to the current station is

shown in the display window.

X Select Info in the radio display by sliding

V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Information on the currently selected

station is displayed. Content is dependent

on the station.

X To return to the radio display: confirm

Info by pressingW.

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.

Satellite radio

Important notes

This section provides detailed information on

the following topics:

Rselecting a channel and program category

Rmemory functions

Rsound settings

i The satellite radio mode described below requires optionally available satellite radio

equipment and registration with a satellite

radio provider.

i Note that the categories and channels shown in the illustrations depend on the

program content offered by the provider.

The program contents may vary. The

illustrations and descriptions in these

operating instructions may therefore differ

from the channels and categories offered

by the provider.

Satellite radio mode may be temporarily

unavailable or interrupted for a variety of

reasons. These reasons include

148 Satellite radio A u d io

environmental or topographical conditions

as well as other issues beyond the control

of Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Operation

may also be impaired in certain locations

(e.g. tunnels, multi-storey car parks or

within as well as close to buildings).

i SIRIUS XM Radio offers more than 130 digital-quality radio channels providing

100% commercial-free music, sports, news

and entertainment.

SIRIUS XM Radio employs a fleet of high-

performance satellites to broadcast around

the clock throughout the USA and Canada.

The satellite radio program is available for

a monthly fee. Details are available from

the SIRIUS XM Service Center and at

http://www.sirius.com (USA) or

http://www.siriuscanada.com

(Canada).

Registering satellite radio

X Switch on satellite radio mode

(Y page 149).

The satellite radio main menu appears

showing the weather channel. You cannot

select any other stations.

X Select Sat Radio in the lower menu bar

and pressW to confirm.

X Select Service and pressW to confirm. The service information screen appears.

Service information screen

1 Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM)

2 SIRIUS XM ID of your satellite receiver

X Call the phone number of your satellite

radio provider shown on the screen.

i You can also have the satellite service activated online. To do so, visit the SIRIUS

XM Radio website at

http://www.sirius.com (USA) or

http://www.siriuscanada.com

(Canada).

Once the connection has been established:

X Follow the instructions of the service staff.

The activation process may take up to ten

minutes. If the activation is completed

successfully, the No Service message

appears in the display, followed by the

satellite radio main menu.

i If registration is not included when purchasing the system, your credit card

details will be required to activate your

account.

If the satellite receiver is not installed or

installed incorrectly, the Device

unavailable message will appear.

Switching on satellite radio mode

Notes

You can also use the multifunction steering

wheel to tune in channels or scroll through

lists, e.g. by pressing the=; 9: buttons (Y page 23).

For important notes on registration, see

"Registering satellite radio" (Y page 149).

Option 1

X Press$ the function button.

The No Service message appears after

switching on or if no signal is being

received. Once COMAND receives the

signal, the satellite radio display appears.

The station last selected is played.

i Repeatedly pressing this function button switches through the wavebands in the

order FM, AM, WB and subsequently

Satellite radio 149

A u d io

switches on the satellite radio. Pressing the

button again takes you back to FM radio

mode.

Option 2

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If satellite radio mode was the last mode

selected, it will now be active.

If another audio mode is switched on, you

can now switch to satellite radio mode in

the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Sat Radio and pressW to confirm.

The No Service message appears when

starting up or if no signal is being received.

If the satellite receiver is not installed or is

not installed correctly, the Device

Unavailable message will appear.

Once COMAND receives the signal, the

satellite radio display appears. The station

last selected is played.

Satellite radio main menu

1 Satellite radio main display

2 Channel name

3 Preset

4 Selected category/channel number

5 Channel information (in brief)

6 Sound settings

7 Category list

8 Channel information (in detail)

9 Channel preset list

a Satellite radio menu

Channel informationA can be viewed in

detail (Y page 153).

Changing the category

Satellite radio stations are sorted into various

categories. You can choose between the

different categories, such as news/talk

shows, sports or country, if they are available.

The category list is sorted alphabetically.

Selecting a category

X To call up the category list: select

Category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

X To select a category: select a category by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressingW to confirm. The category selected is shown in the

display. You hear the station last selected

for this category.

The All Channels category is at the top

of the category list. This category is sorted

150 Satellite radio A u d io

by channel number and allows you to

browse all available channels.

Selecting a channel

Channel search

X Turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller while the display/selection

window in the SatRadio display is active.

or

X Press theE orF button.

COMAND searches in both directions

(ascending and descending) and stops at

the next channel found in the selected

category.

Satellite radio menu

X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The satellite radio menu appears.

Entering channel numbers directly

Option 1

X Press thel button.

An input menu appears.

Option 2

X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select Channel Entry and pressW to confirm.

An input menu appears.

X To enter a channel: irrespective of the

option, press the corresponding number

keys on the control panel one after the

other.

COMAND sets the selected channel.

i You can only select currently permitted digits.

Selecting a channel from the SatRadio

channel list

You can select a channel using either the

channel list (option 1) or the channel list that

displays the artists or tracks currently being

played (option 2).

X Select Sat in the submenu bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Option 1

X Select Channel List and pressW to confirm.

The channel list appears.

Satellite radio 151

A u d io

X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Option 2

X Select Channel List with Artist,

Title and pressW to confirm. The channel list appears and displays the

artists and tracks currently being played.

X Select a channel by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Memory functions

Storing channels

i There are ten presets available.

X PressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.

or

X Select Presets in the submenu bar by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. In both cases, the channel presets appear.

TheR dot in front of a preset entry

indicates that the currently selected

station is stored under this preset.

Station presets

X Select a preset by turning cVd the COMAND controller and press and hold

W until you hear a tone.

or

X Press and hold a number button, e.g.

n, until you hear a tone.

The channel is stored under the preset.

Storing channels automatically

This function automatically stores channels

with adequate reception in the preset

memory. Channels stored manually in the

preset memory will be overwritten.

X Option 1: pressW the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is

active.

X Select Autostore in the presets by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Option 2: select Presets in the submenu

bar by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Autostore and pressW to confirm. In both cases, COMAND searches for

channels that can be received. You will see

a message to this effect. The available

channels are automatically stored in the

preset positions.

X To cancel storing: select Cancel and

pressW to confirm.

152 Satellite radio A u d io

Selecting a channel from the preset list

X To call up the preset list: select

Presets in the submenu bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The channel preset list appears.

X To set a channel: select a preset by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press a number key, such asn.

Displaying information

X Select Info in the submenu bar by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Information on the currently received

program is displayed.

If available, you see:

Rthe complete channel name

Rthe artist of the currently played track

Rthe currently played track

X To return to the radio display: confirm

Info by pressingW.

X Slide ZV the COMAND controller up.

Displaying service information

The provider's customer service center is

available by phone at any time to answer any

general questions or questions on the

versions available.

X Select Sat radio in the submenu bar by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Service and pressW to confirm. The provider's details appear.

1 Provider's phone number (SIRIUS XM) or

Call Service Provider

2 SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver

X To return to the SatRadio main display:

slide XVY the COMAND controller.

Channel list updates

When receiving a new channel list, the display

shows the Updating Channels...

message.

The station last selected is switched to mute

until the update has been completed.

Satellite radio mode is not available during

this process.

Once the update has been completed, the

satellite radio main menu appears. The

station last selected is played.

Sound settings

You will find details on the sound settings in

the "At a glance" section (Y page 34).

Satellite radio 153

A u d io

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode

Important safety notes

G WARNING

COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser

product. You must not open the casing. If you

open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or

damaged, there is a risk of exposure to

invisible laser radiation. This may damage

your eyes, or those of others.

COMAND does not contain any parts that can

be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,

all maintenance work must be carried out by

qualified aftersales technicians.

G WARNING

Only when the vehicle is stationary should

you:

Rload a disc

Reject a disc

There is a risk of being distracted from the

road and traffic conditions if this is done while

the vehicle is in motion.

Inserting/ejecting CDs/DVDs

Notes

If the CD/DVD has a printed side, this must

face upwards when the CD/DVD is inserted.

If neither side is printed, the side to be played

should face downwards. The system may not

be able to play CDs/DVDs with copy

protection.

i If a medium contains other files in addition to music files, the loading time

before the first track starts to play may be

longer.

Inserting discs into the DVD changer

The DVD changer has a fixed magazine with

six trays.

X To insert a CD/DVD into the magazine

tray: press theV load/eject button.

A menu shows the current load status of

the magazine trays. The last tray selected

is identified by a red digit.

Magazine menu

X Select a magazine tray to be filled by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press a number key, e.g.j.

The DVD changer switches to the selected

magazine tray. You see the Please

wait... message.

You then see the Please insert disc

. message.

i Never insert a data medium before COMAND prompts you to do so. Never

insert more than one disc into a magazine

tray at a time.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the

printed side facing upwards.

154 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io

The DVD changer loads the disc into the

selected magazine tray. The Loading

disc message appears.

i It may take some time for the disc to be loaded, depending on the type of disc. If no

disc is inserted for approximately 20

seconds, the display returns to the

magazine menu.

The DVD changer plays the disc if:

Rit has been inserted correctly.

Rit is a permissible type of disc.

: Full magazine tray (eject function is

available)

; Empty magazine tray (disc can be

inserted)

X To exit the menu: press theV eject/

load button again or press the% back

button.

or

X Select Back by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X To fill empty magazine trays: press the

V load/eject button.

The magazine menu appears.

X Select Fill Empty Slots.

You see the Please Wait... message.

COMAND switches to the next empty

magazine tray. You then see the Please

Insert Disc . message.

i Never insert a data medium before COMAND prompts you to do so. Never

insert more than one disc into a magazine

tray at a time.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot with the

printed side facing upwards.

You see the Please Wait... message.

Once the disc is loaded, the DVD changer

switches to the next empty tray. You see

the Please Insert Disc message.

X Repeat this step until all trays are loaded.

The DVD changer will play the last disc

loaded if it has been inserted correctly and

is of a permissible type. This applies even

if not all trays have been loaded with a disc.

X To cancel loading: press theV eject/

load button again or press the% back

button.

i If you cancel loading with the% back

button, the system loads and plays the last

CD you inserted.

Ejecting discs from the DVD changer

If you remove one disc while playing another

disc, the DVD changer interrupts playback.

Playback continues once the disc has been

ejected.

X To eject a CD/DVD: press theV load/

eject button.

Themagazinemenu appears. Themagazine

tray with the current disc is highlighted.

: Eject possible

; Disc type

= Disc name (only if stored on the disc)

? Current disc

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 155

A u d io

Z

X Select a magazine tray containing a disc by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

or

X Press a number key, e.g.j.

You see the message: Ejecting Disc

... You then see the following

message:

X Take the disc out of the slot.

If you do not take the disc out of the slot,

COMANDwill draw it in again automatically

after a short while and load it again.

X To eject all CDs/DVDs: press theV load/eject button.

The magazine menu appears.

X Select Eject All by sliding V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The DVD changer ejects the last disc

selected. You see themessage: Ejecting

Disc

X Take the disc out of the disc slot when you

see the Please Remove Disc

message.

The DVD changer switches to the next

loaded magazine tray and ejects the disc.

X Repeat the last step until the magazine is

empty.

X To exit the menu: press theV eject/

load button again or press the% back

button.

or

X Select Back by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Inserting and ejecting an SD memory

card

General information

COMAND supports SD memory cards

(Secure Digital) and SDHC memory cards

(Secure Digital High Capacity).

i Not all memory cards available on the market are designed for the temperatures

which may be reached in the vehicle.

If you are no longer using the SD memory

card, remove it from COMAND, as high

temperatures could damage the card.

Due to the wide range of SD memory cards

available on the market, playback cannot

be guaranteed for all brands of SD memory

card.

The readable storage capacity depends on

the memory card used. You can obtain

further information at any authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

156 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io

Inserting an SD memory card

X Insert the memory card into the slot until it

engages in place. The side with the

contacts must face downwards and point

towards the slot.

COMAND loads the memory card and

shows a message to this effect. If no MP3

tracks can be found, youwill see amessage

to this effect.

Ejecting an SD memory card

X Press the memory card.

The memory card is ejected.

X Take the memory card out of the slot

(Y page 17), positionH.

Connecting a USB device

The USB port is located in the stowage

compartment in the center console.

Electrical consumption at this connection

must not exceed a continuous current of

500 mA. If the electrical consumption is

higher, use a separate source to provide

power for the USB device (e.g.

12 V power supply).

X Connect the USB device (e.g. USB stick) to

the USB port.

Activating audio CD/DVD or MP3

mode

Option 1

X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 154), SDmemory

card (Y page 157) or connect a USB device

(Y page 157).

COMAND loads the medium inserted and

starts to play it.

Option 2

X Press theh function button one ormore

times.

i By pressing the function button

repeatedly, you can change the operating

mode in the following order:

Raudio CD/DVD / video DVD/MP3 CD/

MP3 DVD in the DVD changer (disc

mode)

Rmemory card mode

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode

RBluetooth audio mode

X Select an audiomedium from themedia list

(Y page 159).

Option 3

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The last active audio source is now

activated.

You can activate a different audio source

using the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Disc, Memory Card, Music

Register, USB Storage or Media

Interface and pressW to confirm. This switches to the desired audio source.

X Select an audiomedium from themedia list

(Y page 159).

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 157

A u d io

Z

Example display: audio CD mode

: CD cover (if available)

; Track time

= Track number and track name (only if

stored on the disc as CD text or if

Gracenote data is available)

? Graphic time and track display

A Disc type, disc position in the media list

and disc name (only if stored on the disc

as CD text or if Gracenote data is

available)

B Artist (only if stored on the disc as CD text

or if Gracenote data is available)

C CD mode menu

Example display: audio DVD mode

: Cover (if available)

; Track time

= Track number

? Graphic time and track display

A Disc type, disc position in the media list,

disc name (only if stored on the disc)

B Audio DVD mode menu

Example display: MP3 mode

: Cover (if available)

; Track time

= Track number and name

? Graphic time and track display

A Medium type, position of medium in the

media list, current folder

B Artist (if available)

C MP3 mode menu

Pause function

In audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode

X To pause playback: briefly press the

8 button.

The, symbol appears at the top left in

the status bar.

X To continue playback: briefly press the

8 button again.

The, symbol disappears.

158 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io

In audio DVD mode only

X To pause playback: switch on audio DVD

mode (Y page 157).

X Select by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and

pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it

was interrupted. The display changes

to.

Stop function

This function is only available in audio DVD

mode.

X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 157).

X To interrupt playback: select by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to. remains highlighted.

X To continue playback: select and

pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it

was interrupted.

X To stop playback: while playback is

interrupted, select again and press

W to confirm.

or

X Select and confirm by pressingW twice in rapid succession.

is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and

pressW to confirm. Playback starts at the beginning of the

DVD.

Selecting audio CD/DVD/MP3 discs

Selecting via the media list

X In audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode: select

Media by slidingV or turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The media list appears. The# dot indicates the currentmediumbeing played.

Media list when equipped with a DVD changer

: To display all magazine trays

The media list shows the discs currently

available.

Media list

Magazine trays, positions 1 to 6: readable

datamedia are audio CDs,MP3CDs orMP3

DVDs, audio DVDs and video DVDs.

Memory card, position 7

MUSIC REGISTER, position 8

USB storage device, position 9

Media Interface, position 0

Bluetooth audio

i If a disc cannot be read, an entry appears next to the corresponding magazine tray.

X To show all magazine trays: pressW the COMAND controller when: is

highlighted.

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 159

A u d io

Z

Media list showing all magazine trays

X Select the data medium by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

i If you select a video DVD, the system switches to video DVD mode

(Y page 186).

Selecting a track using the number

keypad

X Press a number key, e.g.n, when the

display/selection window is active.

The medium at the corresponding position

in the media list is loaded and then played.

Selecting a track

Selecting by skipping to a track

X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn

cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.

or

X Press theE orF button.

The skip forward function skips to the next

track.

The skip back function skips to the

beginning of the current track if the track

has been playing for more than

eight seconds. If the track has been playing

for less than eight seconds, it skips to the

start of the previous track.

If you have selected the playback options

Random Tracks or Random Folder, the

track order is random.

Selecting a track using the number

keypad

X Press the button on the number

keypad.

A numerical entry field appears. The

number of positions offered corresponds to

the number of tracks on the CD/DVD. Only

numbers that correspond to a track

number on the CD/DVD can be entered.

X Enter the desired track number using the

number keys.

The track plays after the last possible

number is entered.

i Pressing and holding a number key for more than two seconds completes the

entry, and the corresponding track is

played.

Selecting a track using music search

Select music via categories (e.g. album,

artist) with the music search function.

If you select a category, COMAND starts a

search for track information if the following

conditions are fulfilled:

Rthe data carriers are inserted or connected

Rthe track information from these data

carriers is not yet contained in the

COMAND music database

COMAND imports track information from the

following data carriers:

Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)

Rmemory card

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

The Track information is complete

message appears once the search is

completed. COMAND stores the music data

in its own database. You can now select the

available music data within the desired

category.

160 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io

You will find further information on searching

for music in the "Music search" section

(Y page 165).

X In audio CD/audio DVD mode/MP3 mode,

select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears.

X Select Current Tracklist, Folder or a

category and pressW to confirm.

Current track list (example)

X Select the track by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The basic display appears and the track is

played.

Fast forwarding/rewinding

X While the display/selection window is

active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND

controller until the desired position has

been reached.

or

X Press and hold theE orF button

until the desired position is reached.

Gracenote Media Database

Introduction

This function is only available in audio CD

mode.

There is a version of Gracenote music

recognition technology (Emeryville,

California, USA) on the COMAND hard disk.

You will recognize this by the logo which can

be seen in the bottom right-hand corner of

certain audio displays.

Many audio CDs contain CD text. COMAND

uses the information contained therein to

display the artist, album and track name.

If the audio CD does not contain any CD text

information, COMAND can use the Gracenote

Media Database to identify unknown audio

tracks when running in audio CD mode. This

is only possible if the relevant information is

saved in the Gracenote Media Database and

if the "Gracenote Media Database" function

is activated.

If this is the case, COMAND will display the

corresponding data such as artist, album and

track name in the relevant displays and lists.

If COMAND accesses the Gracenote Media

Database when reading an audio CD, you will

see the following message:

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 161

A u d io

Z

Selecting Gracenote data to be

displayed

If several entries exist for the CD of a

particular artist, you can select which of the

entries should be shown.

If the inserted CD does not contain any

Gracenote data, the Gracenote Media

Database menu item is shown in gray and

cannot be selected.

X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 157).

X Select CD by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Gracenote Media Database by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

The# dot indicates the current selection for the display.

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Switching the Gracenote data display

on/off

X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 157).

X Select CD by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Gracenote Media Database by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To switch off the display: select None and

pressW to confirm.

In the basic display (Y page 158), Track

1, Track 2 etc. are shown instead of the

Gracenote data, for example.

X To switch on the display: select an entry

in the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Updating Gracenotemusic

recognition technology and the

Gracenote Media Database

The digital data on the Gracenote Media

Database needs to be updated due to the

release of new CDs. Optimum functionality

can only be attained with up-to-date

Gracenote music recognition technology.

Information about new versions can be

obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz

Center.

You can have your music recognition

software updated there with a DVD, or you

can update it yourself.

i The Gracenote Media Database is updated in conjunction with the navigation

system's digital map (Y page 109).

Displaying the track and album

X Press thez button.

The current track and album are displayed

in a window.

162 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io

Displaying metadata (MP3 mode)

COMAND can also display the album name

and artist (metadata) during playback, if this

information has been entered into the

system.

For all media that containMP3 data (e.g. MP3

CD, SD memory card, MUSIC REGISTER), you

can determine whether:

Rthe metadata contained in the tags of the

encoded music data should be displayed

Rthe file and directory names should be

displayed during playback

X To display the album and artist name:

select MP3 or USB in the basic display by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Display Track Information and

pressW to confirm.

Selecting a group

The content of an audio DVD can be divided

into up to 9 groups. The availability and type

of group depends on the respective DVD.

A group can contain music in different sound

qualities (stereo and multichannel formats,

for example), or bonus tracks.

Each group can contain up to 99 tracks.

If an audio DVD only contains one audio

format, the Group menu item(s) cannot be

selected.

X Switch on audio DVD mode (Y page 157).

X Select DVD-A by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select Group by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The# dot indicates the group currently selected.

X Select the desired group by turning cVd and pressW to confirm.

X To exit themenu: slide XVY the COMAND controller or press the% back button.

Selecting an active partition (USB

mass storage devices only)

You can select this function for USB mass

storage devices when the storage device is

partitioned. Up to 9 partitions (primary or

logical; FAT and FAT32) are supported.

X Select MP3 in the basic display by sliding

V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Select Active Partition and

pressW to confirm.

Playback options

The following options are available to you:

RNormal Track Sequence

The tracks are played in the normal order

(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).

InMP3mode, the track order is determined

by the order in which the tracks are written

to the MP3 data carrier when it is created.

Alphabetical order is the most common.

Once all the tracks in a folder have been

played, the tracks in the next folder are

played.

RRandom Media

All the tracks on the medium are played in

random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).

RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)

You hear the tracks of the current track list

or the currently active folder (including all

sub-folders) in random order.

X To select options: switch on audio CD/

DVD or MP3 mode (Y page 157).

X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option selected.

X Select an option by turning cVd and press W to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options

except "Normal track sequence", you will

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 163

A u d io

Z

see a corresponding display in the display/

selection window. See the example of the

display in audio CD mode (Y page 158).

i The "Normal track sequence" option is automatically selected when you change

the medium you are currently listening to

or when you select a different medium. If

an option is selected, it remains selected

after COMAND is switched on or off.

Notes on MP3 mode

General information

Depending on the volume and format of the

MP3 data, the length of time required for

reading the data may increase.

Permissible data carriers

RCD-R and CD-RW

RDVD-R and DVD-RW

RDVD+R and DVD+RW

RSD memory card

RUSB storage device

Permissible file systems

RISO 9660/Joliet standard for CDs

RUDF for audio and video DVDs

RFAT16 or FAT32 for SD memory cards and

USB storage media

Multisession CDs

For multisession CDs, the content of the first

session determines how COMAND will

process the CD. COMAND plays only one

session and gives priority to the audio CD

session.

If possible, use COMAND to play only CDs

which have been written in one session.

File structure of a data carrier

When you create a disc with compressed

music files, the tracks can be organized in

folders. A folder may also contain subfolders.

A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.

Each folder can contain a maximum of

255 tracks and 255 subfolders.

The disc may contain no more than eight

directory levels. Files beyond the eighth level

will not be recognized by the system.

Track and file names

When you create a disc with compressed

music files, you can assign names to the

tracks and folders.

COMAND uses these names accordingly for

the display. Folders which contain data other

thanMP3 or WMA tracks are not displayed by

COMAND.

If MP3 or WMA files are stored in the root

directory itself, the root directory will also be

treated as a folder. COMAND will then show

the name of the root directory as the folder

name.

You must observe the following when

assigning track names:

Rtrack names must have at least one

character.

Rtrack names must have the extension

"mp3" or "wma".

Rthere must be a full stop between the track

name and the extension.

Example of a correct track name:

"Track1.mp3".

Permissible formats

COMAND supports the following formats:

RMPEG1 Audio Layer 3 (MP3)

RMicrosoft WindowsMedia Audio V2, V7, V8

and V9 (WMA)

Radditional music files in AAC format with

the file extensions .aac, .mp4, .m4a

and .m4b, but not copy-protected iTunes

music files with the extension .m4p.

i If, in addition to MP3 files, there are other music files in these audio formats stored on

164 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode A u d io

the disc, the loading process may require a

longer time before the first track is played.

i The MP3 audio encoding method is under license from Fraunhofer IIS (Institut

Integrierte Schaltungen Institute for

Integrated Circuits) and Thomson.

Permissible bit and sampling rates

COMAND supportsMP3 files of the following

types:

Rfixed and variable bit rates from 32 kbit/s

to 320 kbit/s

Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz

COMAND supportsWMA files of the

following types:

Rfixed bit rates from 5 kbit/s to 384 kbit/s

Rsampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz

COMAND does not supportWMA files of the

following types:

RDRM (Digital Rights Management)

encrypted files

i Only use tracks with a bit rate of at least 128 kbit/s and a sampling rate of at least

44.1 kHz. Lower rates can cause a

noticeable deterioration in quality. This is

especially the case if you have activated a

surround sound function.

Notes on copyright

MP3 or WMA tracks that you create or play

back are generally subject to copyright

protection in accordance with the applicable

international and national regulations.

In many countries, reproductions, even for

private use, are not permitted without the

prior consent of the copyright holder.

Make sure that you knowabout the applicable

copyright regulations and that you comply

with these.

If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your

own compositions and recordings, or if the

copyright holder has granted you permission,

these restrictions do not apply.

Notes on CDs/DVDs

Discs with copy protection are not

compatible with the audio CD standard and

therefore may not be able to be played by

COMAND.

Playback problems may occur when playing

copied discs. There is a wide range of data

carriers, disc-writing software and writers

available. This variety means that there is no

guarantee that the system will be able to play

discs that you have copied yourself.

There may be playback problems if you play

CDs that you have copied yourself with a

storage capacity of more than 700 MB. CDs

of this type do not conform to the currently

applicable standards.

i On many DVD audio discs, the last track does not contain any music and COMAND

then switches to the next disc. This is

normal systembehavior and does notmean

that there is a malfunction.

! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs. They could peel off and damage the drive.

The drive is designed to hold discs which

comply with the EN 60908 standard.

Therefore, you can only use discs with a

maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.

If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that

contain data on both sides (DVD on one

side and audio data on the other), they

cannot be ejected and can damage the

drive.

Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,

even with an adapter. Only use round discs

with a diameter of 12 cm.

i COMAND is able to play back audio CDs in multichannel audio format.

Music search

Calling up a category list

X Switch on an audio source and call up the

basic display, e.g. CD mode (Y page 158).

Music search 165

A u d io

Z

X Select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears.

Category list

The categories are displayed according to the

data available. The categories Current

Tracklist, Folder, Playlists (if available)

and Photos (if available) are already

assigned. The other available categories are

filled by the music search.

Selecting a category

Starting a music search

If you select a category that contains no

content from the category list, the music

search starts.

The music search finds tracks via all available

media. The search begins with the audio

source that is currently active.

The following media are included for the

music search:

Rdisc mode (audio CD/DVD/MP3)

Rmemory card

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

X Select a category in the category list by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The Reading Data... message appears.

The searchmay take some time, depending

on the number of tracks available.

The Track information is complete

message appears once the search is

completed. Playback then starts with the

previously active audio source.

X To cancel the music search: confirm

Cancel by pressingW.

Selecting an album

X Select Albums in the category list by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available albums are displayed

alphabetically. If there is a cover available

for an album, it is displayed in front of the

album name.

Selecting a track

X Select Tracks in the category list

(Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The available tracks are displayed.

166 Music search A u d io

X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts.

Selecting a year of publication

X Select Year in the category list

(Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select an entry and pressW to confirm. The genre list is displayed.

X Select a genre, e.g. pop, and pressW to confirm.

The track list is displayed.

X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts.

Selecting a cover

X Select Select By Cover in the category

list (Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The available covers are displayed in

alphabetical order of the artists.

X Select the desired cover by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The corresponding album is played.

Selection via keyword search

X Select Keyword Search in the category list

(Y page 165) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. An input menu appears.

X Enter characters and confirm the entry.

Instructions for entering characters can be

found in the "Entering characters in the

phone book and address book" section

(Y page 31).

Depending on the entry, the hits are shown

in a list.

Music search 167

A u d io

Z

X Select an entry by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select an entry, e.g. Artists, and press

W to confirm. The album and cover (if available) are

displayed.

X Confirm the album withW. The tracks on the album are displayed.

X Select a track and pressW to confirm. Playback starts and the basic display

appears.

MUSIC REGISTER

General information

You can store music files in a compressed

format in the MUSIC REGISTER

(Y page 169). The memory has a capacity of

10 GB.

! Retain the original music files in a secure location. If you, for example, accidentally

reset COMAND to the factory settings with

the reset function, all music files in the

MUSIC REGISTER are deleted. Mercedes-

Benz is not liable for any loss of data.

Switching to MUSIC REGISTER

Option 1

X Press theh function button repeatedly

until the MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.

By pressing the function button repeatedly,

you can change the operating mode in the

following order:

Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)

Rmemory card mode

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode

RBluetooth audio mode

168 MUSIC REGISTER A u d io

If music files are available, playback begins at

the point last listened to.

If there are no music files, you will see a

message to this effect.

X Confirm the message by pressingW the COMAND controller and copy the music

files (Y page 169).

Option 2

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If MUSIC REGISTER was the last mode

selected, it is now switched on.

If another audio source is switched on, you

can now switch on the MUSIC REGISTER in

the audio menu.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The audio menu appears.

X Select Music Register and pressW to confirm.

Option 3

X Press ther number key (DVD changer).

The MUSIC REGISTER is switched on.

Importing music files

Introduction

You can copy music files in the file formats

MP3, WMA and AAC (with the file

extensions .m4p, .m4a, .m4b and .aac) from

the following media:

Rdiscs in the DVD changer

Rmemory card

RUSB storage device

i CD information such as album name, disc name, artist and track is provided by the

Gracenote Media Database (Y page 161).

X Switch on audio CD mode (Y page 157).

X With an audio CD inserted, select REC in the

CD basic display by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

Step 1: selecting tracks to import

X Select Track(s) by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

: To record all music files (standard)

; To record individual tracksO

= To confirm your selection

If you do not select any tracks, every track on

the CD will be imported.

Step 2: selecting the target folder

X Select Folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

MUSIC REGISTER 169

A u d io

Z

: To create a new folder (standard)

; Existing folders

= Currently selected folder

X Select a folder by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If you do not select a target folder, a new one

will be created.

Step 3: beginning the import

X Select Start by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Information about the import source and

target as well as the progress is displayed.

The Audio CD basic display automatically

appears after successful import.

X To cancel importing: during importing,

confirm Cancel by pressingW the COMAND controller.

The Audio CD basic display appears.

Deleting all music files

This function deletes all music files from the

MUSIC REGISTER.

! In order to prevent malfunctions, do not use COMAND during this time.

X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Delete All Music Files and

pressW to confirm.

A query appears. No is highlighted.

If you select Yes, all music files are deleted.

You see the Please Wait... message.

Then, you see the Deletion Procedure

Successful message.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Calling up memory space info

X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Memory Info and pressW to confirm.

The following is displayed:

Rstorage capacity

Ravailable memory

Roccupied memory

Rcontent (folders, tracks)

Music search

The music search finds tracks via all available

media. The search begins with the audio

source that is currently active.

The following media are included for the

music search:

Rdisc (audio CD/DVD/MP3)

Rmemory card

170 MUSIC REGISTER A u d io

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).

X Select Search by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The category list appears.

X Select a track in a category (Y page 165).

Example: opening a folder

X Select Folder in the category list by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. You see the contents of the current folder.

The name of the current folder is at the top

and the track currently playing is indicated by

a# dot.

X To switch to the next folder up: press the

% back button or slide XV the COMAND controller.

Changing the folder/track name

X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rename/Delete Files and press

W to confirm.

X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.

X Select Options by slidingVY and press W to confirm.

X Select Change and pressW to confirm.

X Enter a name for the folder/track.

Instructions for entering characters can be

found in the "Entering characters in the

phone book and address book" section

(Y page 31).

X To save the changes: select and

pressW to confirm.

Deleting folders/tracks

X Switch to MUSIC REGISTER (Y page 168).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rename/Delete Files and press

W to confirm.

X Select a folder/track by turning cVd.

X Select Options by slidingVY and press W to confirm.

X Select Delete and pressW to confirm.

A query appears. No is highlighted.

If you select Yes, the folders/tracks are

deleted. You see the Please wait...

message. Then, you see the Data

Deleted message.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

Playback options

The following options are available:

RNormal Track Sequence

The tracks are played in the normal order

(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).

RRandom Medium

All the tracks on the medium are played in

random order.

RRandom Track List (MP3 mode only)

The tracks in the currently active folder/

track list are played in a random order.

MUSIC REGISTER 171

A u d io

Z

X To select options: switch to the MUSIC

REGISTER (Y page 168).

X Select Music Register by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option selected.

X Select an option and pressW to confirm. The option is switched on. For all options

except Normal Track Sequence, you will

see a corresponding display in the display/

selection window.

i The Normal Track Sequence option is automatically selected when you change

the disc you are currently listening to or

when you select a different medium. If an

option is selected, it remains selected after

COMAND is switched on or off.

Bluetooth audio mode

Connecting Bluetooth audio devices

Conditions

Bluetooth audio device

Bluetooth audio mode requires a

Bluetooth-capable audio device.

i Not all Bluetooth audio devices available on the market are equally suitable. For

more detailed information on suitable

Bluetooth audio devices and on

connecting Bluetooth audio devices to

COMAND, visit

http://www.mbusa-mobile.com (for

USA). Alternatively, call theMercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

(for USA) or Customer Relations at

1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Before using Bluetooth audio mode, you

should check your Bluetooth audio device

for the following (see the Bluetooth audio

device's operating instructions):

RBluetooth audio profile

The Bluetooth audio device must support

the A2DP and AVRCP Bluetooth audio

profiles.

RBluetooth visibility

On certain Bluetooth audio devices, as

well as activating the Bluetooth function,

the device itself must also be made

"visible" to other devices (see the

Bluetooth audio device's operating

instructions).

RBluetooth device name

This device name is predetermined but can

usually be changed. To make a clear

selection of the Bluetooth device

possible, Mercedes-Benz recommends

that you customize the device name (see

the Bluetooth audio device's operating

instructions).

i A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution

Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio

data transmission

AVRCP (Audio Video Remote Control

Profile): Bluetooth audio profile for audio

data playback

X Activate Bluetooth and Bluetooth

visibility on the Bluetooth audio device.

On COMAND

X Activate the Bluetooth function in

COMAND (Y page 45).

General information

Before using your Bluetooth audio device

with COMAND for the first time, you will need

to authorize it.

When you authorize a new Bluetooth audio

device, it is connected automatically.

Connection involves first searching for a

172 Bluetooth audio mode A u d io

Bluetooth audio device and then authorizing

it.

You can authorize up to fifteen Bluetooth

devices.

i If you authorize a mobile phone that

supports Bluetooth audio, the A2DP and

AVRCP Bluetooth audio profiles are

connected automatically. The mobile

phone is then entered in both the

Bluetooth telephone list (Y page 116) and

in the Bluetooth device list (Y page 173).

Mercedes-Benz recommends authorizing a

mobile phone in Bluetooth telephony

(Y page 116).

Searching for and authorizing a

Bluetooth audio device

X Switch on Bluetooth audio mode

(Y page 175).

If you see the No Bluetooth Audio

Device Authorized message, you will

need to connect the Bluetooth audio

device first.

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List

by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X To search: confirm Update by pressing

W the COMAND controller.

COMAND searches for Bluetooth audio

devices within range and adds them to the

Bluetooth device list. Bluetooth audio

devices are detected if they support the

Bluetooth audio profiles (A2DP, AVRCP).

The duration of the search depends on the

number of Bluetooth audio devices within

range and their characteristics.

Example: Bluetooth device list

: Newly detected mobile phone with

Bluetooth audio function in range

; Bluetooth audio player not within range

but previously authorized (icon appears in

gray)

The Bluetooth device list displays all

authorized devices, whether they are within

range or not. After a device search, devices

which are within range but not authorized are

also displayed.

i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the

device itself, so that COMAND can play the

audio data.

X To authorize: select an unauthorized

Bluetooth audio device from the list

(example::) by turning cVd the

COMAND controller.

X Select the symbol to the right of the

Bluetooth audio device by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Authorize and pressW to confirm.

Depending on the Bluetooth audio device

used, you now have two options for

continuing with authorization.

X Option 1: enter the passkey. To do so,

proceed as described in the "Authorizing

(registering) a mobile phone" section

(Y page 117).

After successful authorization, the

Bluetooth audio device is connected and

starts playing.

Bluetooth audio mode 173

A u d io

Z

X Option 2 (Secure Simple Pairing): if the

digit codes displayed in COMAND and on

the Bluetooth audio device are the same,

confirm Yes by pressingW.

If you select Yes, authorization continues

and the Bluetooth audio device is

connected. Playback starts.

If you select No, authorization will be

canceled.

i The Bluetooth audio device must

support the Bluetooth version 2.1 for

connection via Secure Simple Pairing.

COMAND creates a six-digit code, which is

displayed on the two devices that are to be

connected.

X External authorization: COMAND may

not be able to locate your Bluetooth audio

device due to the specific security settings

of the Bluetooth audio device itself. In this

case, checkwhether your Bluetooth audio

device can locate the COMAND system

(Y page 118). The Bluetooth device name

of COMAND is MB Bluetooth.

After successful authorization, the

Bluetooth audio device is connected and

starts playing.

Reconnecting a Bluetooth audio

device

The Bluetooth audio profiles are connected

automatically under the following

circumstances:

Rone of the last two mobile phones to have

been connected has also been used as a

Bluetooth audio player (if this function is

supported by the mobile phone).

Rthe mobile phone takes over the automatic

connection itself.

A Bluetooth audio player without telephone

functions is not automatically reconnected,

even if it was the last device connected.

If the No Bluetooth Audio Device

Connected message appears, you have two

options to connect a Bluetooth audio

device:

Option 1

X Confirm Connect Last Device in the

basic display by pressingW the COMAND controller.

If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth

audio device, it will be connected and will

start playing.

i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the

device itself, so that COMAND can play the

audio data.

Option 2

X Select BT Audio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Confirm Bluetooth Audio Device List

by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X Select a Bluetooth audio device by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

If COMAND can locate the Bluetooth

audio device, it will be connected and will

start playing.

i With some Bluetooth audio devices, playback must be initially started on the

device itself, so that COMAND can play the

audio data.

Bluetooth audio device and

simultaneous search for mobile phones

During the search for mobile phones

(Y page 116), the connection with the

Bluetooth audio device is terminated. In the

Bluetooth audio basic display

(Y page 176), you will see the Received

Business Cards message and the

Received Business Cards menu item

cannot be selected.

174 Bluetooth audio mode A u d io

Displaying details

X Select a Bluetooth audio device in the

Bluetooth device list.

X Select the symbol to the right of the

Bluetooth audio device by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Details and pressW to confirm. The following information concerning the

selected mobile phone is shown:

RBluetooth name

RBluetooth address

Ravailability status (shown after an

update)

Rauthorization status

X To close the detailed view: turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.

De-authorizing (de-registering) a

Bluetooth audio device

X Select a Bluetooth audio device in the

Bluetooth device list.

X Select the symbol to the right of the

Bluetooth audio device by slidingVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select De-Authorize and pressW to confirm.

A prompt appears asking whether you

really wish to de-authorize this device.

X Select Yes or No.

If you select Yes, the device will be deleted

from the Bluetooth device list.

If you select No, the processwill be aborted.

i Before re-authorizing the Bluetooth

audio device, you should also delete the

device name MB Bluetooth from your

Bluetooth audio device's Bluetooth list

(see the Bluetooth audio device's

operating instructions).

Switching to Bluetooth audio mode

Option 1

X Connect (Y page 172) or reconnect

(Y page 174) a Bluetooth audio device.

COMAND activates the Bluetooth audio

device. The basic display appears and the

device starts playing.

Option 2

X Press theh function button one ormore

times.

i By pressing the function button

repeatedly, you can change the operating

mode in the following order:

Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)

Rmemory card mode

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode

RBluetooth audio mode

Option 3

X Select Bluetooth Audio (Y page 159) in

themedia list by turningcVd theCOMAND controller and pressW to confirm. COMAND activates the connected device.

You will see a message to this effect. The

basic display then appears.

Bluetooth audio mode 175

A u d io

Z

Example: Bluetooth audio basic display

: Track name

; Current playback settings (no symbol for

"Normal track sequence")

= Album name

? Sound settings

A Media list

B Artist

C To stop or start playback

D To connect a Bluetooth audio device or

increase the volume using COMAND

E Bluetooth audio data medium type

F Data medium position in the media list

i If the Bluetooth audio device connected supportsmetadata and corresponding data

is available, then the artist, track and album

name can be displayed.

Starting/stopping playback

X To start playback: select by sliding

V and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Playback starts. Selection is at.

X To stop playback: select by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A message appears. Selection is at.

X To continue playback: select by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A message appears. Selection is at.

Starting playback if the Bluetooth

audio device has been stopped

During the search for mobile phones

(Y page 116), the connection with the

Bluetooth audio device is terminated. In the

Bluetooth audio basic display (Y page 176),

you will see the No Bluetooth Audio

Device Connected message and the

Connect Last Devicemenu item cannot be

selected.

When the search is finished, the Bluetooth

audio device can be reconnected.

X Confirm Connect Last Device by

pressingW.

Depending on the Bluetooth audio device

used, playback starts immediately or you

must start playback manually.

In this case, you will see the Bluetooth

Audio Device Paused message.

X To start playback: select by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. Playback resumes from the beginning.

176 Bluetooth audio mode A u d io

Selecting a track

This function is not supported by all

Bluetooth audio devices.

X To skip forwards or backwards to a

track: press theE orF button on

COMAND.

or

X Press the9 or: button briefly on

the multifunction steering wheel.

X Rapid scroll: press and hold the9 or: button on the multifunction

steering wheel until the desired track is

reached.

If you hold down the9 or: button,

the system runs through the list more

quickly.

Selecting playback options

If the Bluetooth audio device supports the

corresponding function, the following options

are available:

RNormal Track Sequence

The tracks are played in the normal order

(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).

Audio data playback is determined by the

order in which the tracks are written to the

data carrier. Alphabetical order is the most

common. Once all the tracks in a folder

have been played, the tracks in the next

folder are played.

RRandom Tracks

All the tracks on the medium are played in

random order (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The# dot indicates the option selected.

X Select the option by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

If you select Random Tracks, you will see

a corresponding symbol in the display/

selection window.

Adjusting the sound settings

The sound settings are described using radio

mode as an example in the "Basic functions

of COMAND" section (Y page 34).

Increasing the volumeusingCOMAND

X Select BT Audio by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select Volume and pressW to confirm. A menu appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.

You will find further information in the "Audio

AUX mode" section (Y page 182).

Bluetooth audio mode 177

A u d io

Z

Media Interface mode

Connection options

Overview

The connection sockets are located in the

stowage compartment in the center console.

Device-specific adapter cables, included with

the Media Interface, are required to connect

external devices to the Media Interface.

i Store individual parts in a safe place.

Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz

connection cables.

You can connect the following data media to

COMAND via the Media Interface:

RiPod

Rcertain MP3 players

i iPod is a registered trademark of Apple Inc., Cupertino, California, USA.

Supported devices

For details and a list of supported devices,

visit http://www.mbusa-mobile.com.

Alternatively, call the Mercedes-Benz

Customer Assistance Center at

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)

(for USA) or Customer Relations at

1-800-387-0100 (for Canada).

Connecting an external device

i Do not leave external devices in the vehicle, as their correct function cannot be

guaranteed if they are subjected to

extreme temperatures, e.g. from exposure

to direct sunlight or very low outside

temperatures (see the operating

instructions of the respective device).

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC accepts no

liability for damage to external devices.

Never connect more than one device at a

time. You will otherwise not be able to play

back from the external device.

: Four-pin socket for inch stereo jack,

e.g. for MP3 players (audio and video)

; iPod plug for connecting an iPod

= USB socket for connecting an MP3 player

? Example of device: iPod

X Connect the external device with suitable

socket:,; or=.

COMAND activates the device; a message

appears.

If you remove a device, the No Device

Connected message appears.

i A connected iPod or MP3 player should not be simultaneously operated via the

Media Interface and the remote control

(e.g. Bluetooth remote control) or directly

on the device itself as this may cause

unforeseen technical difficulties.

i Connecting a fully discharged iPod or MP3 player can result in an extended

initialization period.

Malfunction messages appear while the

device is being activated if:

RCOMAND does not support the device

connected (External Device

Unavailable message).

Rthe connected device consumes too much

power.

Rthe Media Interface connection is faulty.

Ra mass storage device (e.g. USB stick or

USB hard disk) is connected to the Media

Interface (Please Connect The Device

To The Other USB Port message).

178 Media Interface mode A u d io

i The separate USB connection ensures quick access and expanded media content

options.

i Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center if you have further questions.

Switching to Media Interface mode

General information

In extreme cases, starting up individual

functions can take up to several minutes

this depends on the external device and its

content (e.g. video podcasts).

Only use the original software to save files on

iPods or MP3 players. Otherwise, some or all

functions may not be available.

Option 1

X Connect an external device (Y page 178).

COMAND activates the device. The basic

display then appears.

Option 2

The external device is connected to theMedia

Interface.

X Press theh function button one ormore

times.

By pressing the function button repeatedly,

you can change the operating mode in the

following order:

Raudio CD/DVD/MP3 (disc)

Rmemory card mode

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode

RBluetooth audio mode

Option 3

X Press thei number button.

This selects the connected external audio

device directly.

Option 4

X In the media list (Y page 159), select the

entry at position 0 by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

COMAND activates the connected device.

You will see a message to this effect. The

basic display then appears.

If no device is connected, you will see the

Media Int. entry instead of a device

name.

Media Interface mode (iPod mode) when equipped with a DVD changer

: Type of data medium

; Track number

= Elapsed track time (also in format

00:00:00 for audio books)

? Track name

A Graphic time display

B Graphic track display

C Sound settings

D Media list

E Album name (if available)

F Music search

G Position in the media list

H Artist (if available)

I Playback options

Type of device: connected is indicated by

the corresponding symbol for iPod or MP3

player.

Media Interface mode 179

A u d io

Z

The current playback option (Y page 163) is

shown with a symbol behind album name

E (no display for Normal Track Sequence).

i If the device connected does not contain any playable tracks, a message appears to

this effect.

Selecting music files

Note

COMAND displays the data stored on the

iPod or MP3 player according to the filing

structure used in the respective medium.

Selecting by skipping to a track

X To skip forwards or back to a track: turn

cVd the COMAND controller when the display/selection window is active.

or

X Press theE orF button.

The skip forward function skips to the next

track. The skip back function skips to the

beginning of the current track if the track

has been playing for more than eight

seconds. If the track has been playing for

less than eight seconds, it skips to the start

of the previous track. If you have selected

a playback option other than Normal

Track Sequence, the track sequence is

random.

Selecting using the number keypad

X To make an entry: press thel button.

An input menu appears. The number of

characters available for input depends on

the number of stored tracks.

X To enter a track number: press a number

key, e.g.q.

The digit is entered in the first position in

the input line.

i COMAND will ignore and not display an invalid digit.

X Enter more numbers if desired.

The track plays after the last possible

number is entered.

i Pressing and holding a number key for more than two seconds completes the

entry, and the corresponding track is

played.

Fast forwarding/rewinding

X While the display/selection window is

active, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired position has

been reached.

or

X Press and hold theF orE button

until the desired position is reached.

i On an iPod/iPhone, fast rewind only functions within the current track.

Selecting a category/playlist/folder

Overview

iPod and certain MP3 players

For an iPod or MP3 player, you can select

tracks using categories or folders.

Depending on the device connected, the

following categories may be available, for

example:

RCurrent Tracklist

RPlaylists (e.g. All)

RArtists

RAlbums

RTracks

RPodcasts

RGenres

RComposers

RAudiobooks

i Some playback categories contain the entry All. If this entry has been selected,

the entire content of the category selected

will be played.

180 Media Interface mode A u d io

Calling up a category list

X Select Search in the basic display by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

i The Search menu item is not available until the device has been activated.

Example: category list

X Select Current Tracklist by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The content of the current track list

appears.

Example: current track list

: Symbol for next folder up

; Device icon and device name

= Track symbol

? Current title

X Select the track by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The track is played.

X To switch to the next folder up: slide

XV the COMAND controller or press the % button.

Playing back the content of a category

or folder

X Select the category or folder by turning

cVd the COMAND controller.

X PressW the COMAND controller for longer than two seconds.

The content of the category or folder

selected is played in accordance with the

playback option (Y page 163) selected.

Alphabetical track selection

iPod and MP3 players

This function is available for alphabetically

sorted categories and folders. This function

is not available for albums or playlists, for

example.

X Select a category, e.g. Artists, by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. The available artists are displayed.

X Press the corresponding number key once

or several times to select the first letter of

the artist's name (e.g. for an artist

beginning with the letter "C", press number

keyl three times).

The available letters are listed at the lower

edge of the display.

After a message, the first entry in the list

which matches the letter entered is

highlighted.

i If no corresponding entry exists, the last entry corresponding to a previous letter is

highlighted instead.

i For iPods and MP3 players, the quality of the search results is highly dependent on

the version and language variant of the

software (e.g. iTunes version) used to

populate the device.

Media Interface mode 181

A u d io

Z

If different sorting rules are defined (e.g. in

iTunes), the search is canceled without

any result.

Playback options

The following options are available:

RNormal Track Sequence

Normal track sequence: you hear the

tracks in their normal order (e.g. numerical

or alphabetical).

RRandom Medium

All the tracks on the medium are played in

random order.

RRandom Track List

The tracks in the currently active category

or folder, including any subfolders, are

played in random order.

i For MP3 players, the random playlists offer a maximum of 300 tracks chosen at

random.

X To select a playback option: select

Media Interface in the basic display by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option selected.

X Select an option and pressW to confirm.

MP3 player instructions

Data formats

MP3 andWMA are supported as data formats

with fixed and variable bit rates (up to

320 kbits/s).

Special considerationswhen usingMP3

players

Up to eight directory levels with up to 1000

tracks per directory are supported.

Do not use USB extension leads or adapters.

They can impair functionality.

i DRM (Digital Rights Management) protected files are not supported by the

Media Interface.

Audio AUX mode

Notes on audio AUX mode

You can connect an external audio source

(AUX) to COMAND. The socket for this is

located in the glove box.

If COMAND is equipped with a Media

Interface, external audio sources are

connected using the corresponding cable set.

An AUX socket is not provided. The

connections for the Media Interface are

located in the stowage compartment in the

center console.

i You will find further information online at http://www.mbusa-mobile.com. Or call

the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes

(1-800-367-6372) (for the USA) or

Customer Relations at 1-800-387-0100

(for Canada).

Activating audio AUX mode

When you connect an external audio source,

audio AUX is not selected automatically.

X Select Audio in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If AUX mode was the last mode selected, it

will now be active.

If another audio source is switched on, you

can now switch to audio AUX mode in the

audio menu.

X Select Audio using ZV and pressW to confirm.

The audio menu appears.

182 Audio AUX mode A u d io

X Select Aux using cVd and pressW to confirm.

The audio AUX menu appears. The medium

in the external audio source is played, if the

source is connected and playback

selected.

Please see the respective operating

instructions for how to operate the external

audio source.

You will find details on volume (Y page 33)

and sound (Y page 34) settings in the "At a

glance" section.

G WARNING

External audio sources may have different

volumes, which can mean that system

messages such as traffic announcements and

navigation system announcements are much

louder. If necessary, please deactivate the

system messages or adjust their volume

manually.

Increasing the volumeusingCOMAND

In some cases, the volume of the external

audio device may be quieter or louder, or the

usual maximum possible volume may be

lower. On some devices, it is possible to

adjust the volume separately. In this case,

start at a medium volume and increase it

gradually. This enables you to determine

whether the system is able to play the music

at high volume without distorting it.

X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.

Standard: the volume of the external audio

source is adjusted to a standard value.

Boost: the volume of the external audio

source is raised by approximately 10 dB.

Audio AUX mode 183

A u d io

Z

184

COMAND features ............................. 186

General information ......................... 186

Basic settings .................................... 186

Video DVD mode ............................... 186

AUX video mode ................................ 192

Picture viewer ................................... 193

185

V id e o

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

General information

Automatic picture shutoff

The video image is only displayed if the

selector lever of the transmission is in

position P.

If the selector lever of the transmission is

changed from position P, the In order not

to distract you from the traffic

situation, the picture is faded out

while the vehicle is in motion.

message appears

As soon as the selector lever of the

transmission is returned to position P, the

video image is shown.

Basic settings

Picture settings

Adjusting the brightness, contrast or

color

X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Changing the picture format

X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or

Widescreen and pressW to confirm. The dot in front of the entry indicates the

currently selected format.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Video DVD mode

Safety notes

G WARNING

COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser

product. You must not open the casing. If you

open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or

damaged, there is a risk of exposure to

invisible laser radiation. This may damage

your eyes, or those of others.

COMAND does not contain any parts that can

be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,

all maintenance work must be carried out by

qualified aftersales technicians.

G WARNING

Only when the vehicle is stationary should

you:

Rload a disc

Reject a disc

There is a risk of being distracted from the

road and traffic conditions if this is done while

the vehicle is in motion.

186 Video DVD mode V id e o

Notes about discs

Playback problems may occur when playing

copied discs. There are a large variety of

discs, DVD authoring software, writing

software and writers available. This variety

means that there is no guarantee that the

systemwill be able to play discs that you have

copied yourself.

! Do not affix stickers or labels to the discs, as they could peel off and damage

COMAND. Stickers can cause the disc to

bend, which can result in read errors and

disc recognition problems.

! COMAND is designed to accommodate discs which comply with the EN 60908

standard. You can therefore only use discs

with a maximum thickness of 1.3 mm.

If you insert thicker discs, e.g. those that

contain data on both sides (DVD on one

side and audio data on the other), they

cannot be ejected and can damage

COMAND.

Use round discs with a diameter of 12 cm.

Do not use discs with a diameter of 8 cm,

even with an adapter.

DVD playback conditions

If video DVDs do not conform to the NTSC or

PAL TV standards, they may create picture,

sound or other problems during playback.

COMAND can play back video DVDs

produced according to the following

standards:

Rregion code 1 or region code 0 (no region

code)

RPAL or NTSC standard

You will generally find the relevant details

either on the DVD itself or on the DVD case.

i If you insert a video DVD with a different region code, you will see a message to this

effect.

i COMAND is set to region code 1 at the factory. This setting can be changed at an

authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. This will

allow you to play video DVDs with a

different region code, provided that they

are produced in accordance with the PAL

or NTSC standard. The region code can be

changed up to five times.

Function restrictions

Depending on the DVD, it is possible that

certain functions or actions will be

temporarily blocked ormay not function at all.

As soon as you try to activate these functions

or actions, you will see theK symbol in the display.

Inserting and removing DVDs

X Proceed as described in the "Inserting and

ejecting CDs and DVDs" section

(Y page 154).

Switching to video DVD mode

Option 1

X DVD changer: insert a video DVD.

X Press theh function button or the

% back button.

COMAND loads the medium inserted and

starts to play it.

Option 2

X Press theh function button one ormore

times.

COMAND switches to the previous disc

operating mode.

Video DVD mode 187

V id e o

Z

i By pressing this function button

repeatedly, you can change the operating

mode in the following order:

Raudio CD/DVD, video DVD or MP3 disc

in the DVD changer

Rmemory card mode

RMUSIC REGISTER

RUSB storage device

RMedia Interface or audio AUX mode

RBluetooth audio mode

X Select Media by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select a video DVD from the media list

(Y page 190).

Option 3

X Select Video in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. Video DVD mode is switched on.

Hiding/showing the navigation menu

X To display: slide ZV the COMAND controller.

i This function is not available while the DVD's own menu (Y page 190) is being

displayed.

X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller.

or

X Wait for approximately eight seconds.

Navigation menu displayed

: Disc type

; Current title

= Current scene

? Track time

A To show the menu

Showing/hiding the menu

This function is not available while the DVD's

own menu (Y page 190) is being displayed.

X To display: in full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller.

or

X Select Menu while the navigation menu is

shown and pressW to confirm.

X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller

and confirm Full Screen by pressingW.

Menu shown

: Video DVD options

; Pause function

= Stop function

188 Video DVD mode V id e o

? Media selection

A Sound settings

Fast forwarding/rewinding

X In full-screenmode, slide XVY and hold the COMAND controller until the desired

position has been reached.

or

X Press and hold theE orF button

until the desired position is reached.

You see the navigation menu.

Stop function

X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X To interrupt playback: select by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to. The

video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select and

pressW to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it

was interrupted.

X To stop playback: while playback is

interrupted, select again and press

W to confirm.

or

X During playback, confirm by pressing

W twice in rapid succession. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: confirm the selection by pressingW. Playback restarts from the beginning.

Pause function

X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X To pause playback: select by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and

pressW to confirm. The menu is hidden.

Selecting a scene/chapter

If the film is divided into scenes or chapters,

you can select them directly while the film is

running, or skip forwards step-by-step. Some

DVDs do not permit this at certain points (e.g.

during the opening credits).

It may also be possible to select the scene/

chapter from within the menu stored on the

DVD.

X To skip forwards or back: in full-screen

mode, turn cVd or slide XVY the COMAND controller.

or

X Press theE orF button on the

control panel.

The navigation menu (Y page 188) appears

for approximately eight seconds.

Selecting a film/title

This function is only available if the DVD is

divided into several films/titles. If the DVD

contains several films, these can be selected

directly. A film can be selected either when

the DVD is being played back or when it is

stopped.

The film can also be selected from the menu

on the DVD itself.

Video DVD mode 189

V id e o

Z

X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

A menu appears.

X Select Title Selection by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select a film/title and pressW to confirm.

Selecting a video DVD from themedia

list

X PressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select Changer or Media by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The media list appears. The# dot indicates the currentmediumbeing played.

Video DVDs are indicated by the icon.

X Equipped with a DVD changer: pressW the COMAND controller to display all

magazine trays.

X Select a video DVD by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

COMAND loads the video DVD and begins

playing it.

i If you select a CD, an audio DVD or an MP3 medium, you switch to the respective

audio mode. You can find further

information about the media list on

(Y page 159).

DVD menu

Calling up the DVD menu

TheDVDmenu is themenu stored on theDVD

itself. It is structured in various ways

according to the individual DVD and permits

certain actions and settings.

In the case of multi-language DVDs, for

example, you can change the DVD language

in the DVD menu.

X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

X Select Menu and pressW to confirm. The DVD menu appears.

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu

X Select a menu item by sliding ZV or turning XVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The menu appears.

i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.

190 Video DVD mode V id e o

X To reconfirm your selection: confirm

Select by pressingW.

COMAND executes the action.

Make a selection from the further options,

if necessary.

COMAND then switches back to the DVD

menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to movie), Play,

Stop,.,/ or Go Up may not

function or may not function at certain

points in the DVD menu. To indicate this,

theK icon appears in the display.

Moving up one level in the DVD menu

X Select the corresponding menu item in the

DVD menu and pressW the COMAND controller to confirm.

or

X Select any menu item in the DVDmenu and

pressW the COMAND controller to confirm.

X Select Go Up and pressW to confirm.

Back to the film

X Press the% back button repeatedly

until you see the movie.

or

X Select the corresponding menu item from

the DVD menu.

X Select the Back (to movie)menu item in

the menu and pressW to confirm.

Setting the language and audio

format

This function is not available on all DVDs. If it

is available, you can set the DVD menu

language, the audio language or the audio

format. The number of settings is determined

by the DVD content. It is possible that the

settings may also be accessed in the DVD

menu (Y page 190).

X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

X Select Menu Language or Audio

Language and pressW to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few

seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Subtitles and camera angle

These functions are not available on all DVDs.

The number of subtitle languages and camera

angles available depends on the content of

the DVD. It is possible that the settings may

also be accessed in the DVD menu

(Y page 190).

X In full-screen mode, pressW the COMAND controller to show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video in the menu by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and pressW to confirm.

X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and

pressW to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the current

setting.

X Select a setting by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Video DVD mode 191

V id e o

Z

Interactive content

DVDs can contain interactive content (e.g. a

video game). In a video game, for example,

you may be able to influence events by

selecting and triggering actions. The type and

number of actions depend on the DVD.

X Select an action by slidingZV orXVY the COMAND controller and pressW to execute it.

A menu appears and the first entry,

Select, is highlighted.

X PressW the COMAND controller.

AUX video mode

Connecting external video sources

If your vehicle is equipped with a Media

Interface (Y page 178), you can connect an

external video source (AUX video).

The 1/8 inch audio/video jacks are in the

center console stowage compartment.

i In vehicles with a rear view camera, the AUX video jack cannot be used for external

video sources.

Switching to AUX video mode

X Select Video in the main function bar by

sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. If AUX video mode was the last mode

selected, it will now be active.

If another video source is switched on, you

can now switch to AUX video mode in the

video menu.

X Select Video and pressW to confirm.

X Select Aux and pressW to confirm. The AUX video menu appears. You will hear

and see the content of the external video

source if it is connected and switched to

playback.

AUX video mode

For details on how to operate the external

video source, see the respective device's

operating instructions.

Showing/hiding the menu

X To show: pressW the COMAND controller.

X To hide: slide ZV the COMAND controller

and confirm Full Screen by pressingW.

Volume and sound settings

You will find details on volume (Y page 33)

and sound (Y page 34) settings in the "At a

glance" section.

G WARNING

External video sources may have different

volumes, which can mean that system

messages such as traffic announcements and

navigation system announcements are much

louder. If necessary, please deactivate the

system messages or adjust their volume

manually.

i It may be the case that a device which is connected as an external video source

seems quieter or louder in the vehicle, or

that the usual maximum volume cannot be

reached. On some devices, it is possible to

adjust the volume separately. In this case,

start at a medium volume and increase it

gradually. This enables you to determine

192 AUX video mode V id e o

whether the system is able to play the

sound at high volume without distorting it.

Increasing the volumeusingCOMAND

X Select Volume in the AUX display by turning

cVd the COMAND controller and press W to confirm. A menu appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select Standard or Boost and pressW to confirm.

Standard: the volume of the external video

source is adjusted to a standard value.

Boost: the volume of the external video

source is raised by approximately 10 dB.

Picture viewer

Introduction

If there are pictures on the active data

medium, you can look at them.

Data medium Supported picture

formats

CD/DVD with

picture files

jpeg, jpg

USB devices (sticks,

hard drives)

SD memory card:

jpeg, jpg

Calling up a category list

X Select a data medium (e.g. memory card)

with pictures in the audio menu

(Y page 144) or in the media list

(Y page 159).

X Select Search in the basic display by

slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The category list appears.

Displaying pictures

X Select (Y page 166) Photos in the

category list by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A folder directory appears.

X Select a folder with photos and pressW to confirm.

The folder displays the existing picture files

(example).

X Select a photo and pressW to confirm. The photo is displayed and the music is

stopped.

Changing the picture view

X PressW the COMAND controller. A menu appears.

Picture viewer 193

V id e o

Z

X To turn the picture clockwise: confirm

Turn Clockwise by pressingW the COMAND controller.

X To turn the picture counter-clockwise:

select Turn Counterclockwise by

turning the cVd COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To zoom into a picture: select Zoom by

turning the cVd COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. After you have zoomed into the picture, you

can move the section of the picture.

X Slide ZV and XVY the COMAND controller.

X To return to the original size: pressW the COMAND controller.

Exiting the picture viewer

X Select Back To Menu in the menu by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X To start playing music: confirm Search

by pressingW. The category list appears (Y page 165).

X Select a category by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select other entries within the category

(e.g. track, album) until the music starts

playing.

194 Picture viewer V id e o

COMAND features ............................. 196

SIRIUS Weather ................................ 196

195

W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

SIRIUS Weather

Introduction

For the reception of weather forecasts via

satellite radio, you will need a SIRIUS XM

Satellite Weather subscription.

When the Call SIRIUS to activate

system at 888-539-7474messagewith the

SIRIUS device identification number appears,

you will first have to obtain access to the

weather service. A description of the

procedure can be found in the "Registering

satellite radio" section (Y page 149).

COMAND can receive weather forecasts via

satellite radio for the entire USA (including

Alaska and Hawaii). The received weather

data can be displayed as an information chart

(daily forecast, five-day forecast, detail

information) or on the weather map.

The weather data received from a weather

station is stored in COMAND for an hour and

can be shown again immediately after

restarting the engine (e.g. after refueling).

The weather map can display the following

weather data with symbols:

Rrain radar

Rstorm characteristics

Rareas of high-pressure/low-pressure,

weather fronts

Rcourse of tropical cyclones (hurricanes,

typhoons)

Rwind direction and speeds

i The rain radar cannot be displayed for Alaska, Hawaii and Puerto Rico.

i Hurricane: description of a tropical cyclone which mostly develop in the

Atlantic Ocean or in the North Pacific

Ocean or South Pacific Ocean. The wind

speeds are above 74 mph (118 km/h). To

characterize the strength of a hurricane,

there are five categories.

Typhoon: the description of a tropical

cyclone that develops in the North West

Pacific Ocean. The wind speeds are in the

category of a hurricane.

Switching the SIRIUS weather display

on/off

Switching on

X Select the globe icon in the main function

bar by sliding ZV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

The SIRIUS weather basic display appears.

X Confirm SIRIUS Weather by pressingW. The information chart shows the daily

forecast at the current vehicle position.

196 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

Daily forecast as an information chart (example)

You see the following information:

Rthe date and time of the weather message

received last

Rinformation on the current weather

(temperature, cloud cover) and forecast for

the next 3, 6, 12 hours

Rthe current highest temperature and

forecasts

Rthe current lowest temperature and

forecasts

Rthe probability of rain

X To switch to the five-day forecast:

confirm 5-Day by pressingW. The information chart displays the forecast

for the next five days in the currently

selected location.

Five-day forecast as an information chart (example)

X To return to the daily forecast: confirm

Current by pressingW.

Switching off

X Press the% button.

or

X Select Back by turning cVd the COMAND controller and confirm by pressingW. Both options appear in the SIRIUS weather

basic menu.

Displaying detailed information

Besides the current temperatures, you can

display information such as wind speeds and

UV index.

X Select Info in the information chart by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The information chart shows detailed

information for the selected area.

Selecting the area for the weather

forecast

Introduction

You can select the following areas:

Rthe current vehicle position

Rvicinity of the destination

Ra winter sports area

Ran area within the USA

You can select an area in the information

chart (first option), on the map (second

option) or from the memory, if you have

SIRIUS Weather 197

W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

already saved areas in the memory

(Y page 199).

i COMAND receives weather forecast data from the nearest weather station at the

selected destination.

Option 1: selecting the location in the

information chart

X Select Position in the information chart

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

"Selecting the area for the weather forecast" menu

X To select the current vehicle position:

select Current Position and pressW to confirm.

COMAND receives the weather data for the

current vehicle position from the nearest

weather station and displays it

automatically.

X To select the vicinity of the

destination: select Near Destination in

the menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

i You can select Near Destination if a route has been calculated (Y page 57). The

menu item is otherwise grayed out.

X To select winter sport areas: select In

Winter Sports Areas in the menu, and

confirm by pressingW.

X Select a state, e.g. Colorado, and press

W to confirm.

X Select a winter sports area from the menu

and pressW to confirm. The weather data and other information is

displayed for the winter sports area that

has been selected. The data is supplied by

the nearest weather station.

The information chart shows the following

information (if available):

Rski slopes/ski lifts

Rsnowboarding and nighttime opening

Rsnow conditions (e.g. snow depth)

Rtemperature

X To select the vicinity of another

location: select Search Locations in the

menu by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

198 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

X Select a state, e.g. Florida, and confirm

by pressingW.

X Select a category, e.g. Daytona Beach,

and pressW to confirm. The information chart shows the weather

forecast for the selected area. The data is

supplied by the nearest weather station.

Option 2: selecting the area in the

weather map

X Call up the weather map (Y page 200).

X Move the weather map so that the

crosshair is over the desired area

(Y page 200).

X PressW the COMAND controller. The information chart shows the weather

forecast for the selected area. The data is

supplied by the nearest weather station.

Memory functions

Storing the area in theweathermemory

For areas that are frequently called up, 10

presets (0, 1 9) are available in the weather

memory.

X In the preset memory: select the area for

the weather forecast (Y page 197).

The selected area is shown at the top in the

status bar.

X Select Position in the information chart

by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Memory and pressW to confirm.

X Select the preset by turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller.

X Press and holdW the COMAND controller until the area is entered in the selected

preset.

X To store rapidly: in the daily forecast

(Y page 197) press and hold a number key,

e.g.l, until the preset position number

is shown in the status bar in front of the

area name.

i You can also use this function in the five- day forecast (Y page 197), and in the

detailed information view (Y page 197).

Selecting an area from the weather

memory

X From the weather memory: in the

information chart, select Position by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Memory and pressW to confirm.

X Select a preset that contains an entry by

turning cVd or sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The weather data of the selected area is

shown.

X Rapid selection: if there is an entry

available in the weather memory, e.g. when

SIRIUS Weather 199

W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

the daily forecast is shown, briefly press a

number key, such asl.

The weather data of the selected area is

shown.

Weather map

Calling up the weather map

X Select Map in the information chart by

turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The weather map appears in the 500 km

scale.

Weather map (example)

i For the map display, you can activate the topographic map style (Y page 103).

Moving the weather map

X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller.

The weather map moves in the

corresponding direction under the

crosshair.

Changing the scale

X As soon as you turn cVd the COMAND controller, you see the scale bar.

X Turn cVd until the desired scale is set.

Showing/hiding the menu in the

weather map

X To show: pressW the COMAND controller in the weather map.

X To hide: slide up ZV the COMAND controller.

Selecting a weather station in the map

X Move the weathermap and crosshair to the

desired position (Y page 200).

X PressW the COMAND controller. The menu is shown.

X Confirm Display Weather by pressing

W. COMAND receives the weather data for the

selected position from the nearest weather

station and displays it automatically as a

daily forecast.

200 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

Switching layers on the map on/off

You can switch on differing layers, for example to display the rain radar, weather fronts and

the course of tropical storms on the map.

X Display the menu on the weather map (Y page 200).

X Select Layers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

X Select the layer by turning cVd and sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Switch the display onO or off.

Explanation

Layer Map display Selectable

scales

Radar Map Shows the rain radar as a colored area on the map,

for an explanation of the colors, see the "Legend"

section (Y page 204).

All

Storm

Characteristic

s

Shows the characteristics of a storm

Characteristics are:

Rtornadic storm:

storm cell with strong winds (super cells), from

which a tornado (also know as twister) can

develop.

Rcyclone:

storm cells, from which a tornadic storm can

develop

Rhailstorm

Rthe likelihood of a hailstorm

All

Atmospheric

Pressure

Shows the position of high and low-pressure areas

(H, L), weather fronts and isobars

200 km, 500 km

SIRIUS Weather 201

W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

Layer Map display Selectable

scales

Tropical

Storm Tracks

Shows the path/directional movement speed of a

tropical storm with time and strength information

All

Winds Shows the wind direction and wind speed 5 km

There are a number of illustrated examples in the following section.

Sample displays of weather data in the

map

Rain radar

The Radar Map display layer is activated

(Y page 201) and weather data is available.

Weather map showing the rain radar

The precipitation radar legend can be called

up at (Y page 204).

Storm characteristics

The Storm Characteristics display layer

is activated (Y page 201) and weather data is

available.

Weather map showing a hailstorm and tornadic storms with the path and directional movement speed (example)

Weather map showing a hailstorm (example)

The storms legend can be called up

(Y page 204).

Displaying additional information

X Slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and move the crosshair onto a

corresponding symbol.

X PressW the COMAND controller.

202 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

Weather map with information on a cyclone (example)

The following information is shown (if

available):

Rcategory of the tropical storm

Rdate and time of observation (time stamp)

Rdirectional movement speed and path

i The directional movement speed is the speed at which the storm cell moves.

Weather fronts

The Atmospheric Pressure display layer is

activated (Y page 201) and weather data is

available.

Weather map showing the position of high and low- pressure areas (H, L), weather fronts and isobars (example)

i Isobars are lines that show where the air pressure is the same.

Weather fronts (legend)

: Cold front (blue line with blue triangles)

; Warm front (red line with red semi-circles)

= Stationary front (red-blue line with red

semi-circles and blue triangles)

? Occlusion (violet line with a violet semi-

circle and triangles)

Weather

front

Explanation

Cold front If a cold front moves in, the

weather remains changeable

and there are often rain

showers and thunderstorms.

The air temperature

decreases.

Warm front This can mean longer periods

of rain and can lead to an

increase in cloud cover and a

slow increase in temperature.

Stationary

front

The weather front moves

minimally. The weather

remains changeable in this

area.

Occlusion This occurswhen a faster cold

front reaches an advancing

warm front and combines

with it. The weather remains

changeable and rainy within

an occlusion.

SIRIUS Weather 203

W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

Path of tropical storms

The Tropical Storm Tracks display layer

is activated (Y page 201) and weather data is

available.

Symbol? shows the current position of the

tropical cyclone.

A dashed line shows the path to date and the

predicted path of the cyclone.

More information; can be shown on the

following positions:

Rpositions of previous path=

Rcurrent position?

Rpositions on the predicted route with

information on date:

X In the map, slide XVY, ZV or aVb the COMAND controller and slide the crosshair

to; or=.

X PressW the COMAND controller.

Weather map showing the path of a tropical low- pressure area and further information (example)

Showing information; (if available):

Rname of the tropical storm and category

Rtime stamp

Rdirectional movement speed and path

(Wind)

Rmaximum wind speed (Max. Wind Speed)

i The directional movement speed is the speed at which the storm cell of a tropical

storm moves.

A tropical storm is separated into different

categories according to the location at which

it develops.

Region of

origin

Category

Atlantic,

North and

South Pacific

Oceans

Tropical Low

Pressure System

Tropical Rain Zone

Tropical Storm

Hurricane Category 1

to Hurricane Category

5

Northwest

Pacific

Tropical Low

Pressure System

Tropical Cyclone

Typhoon

Super-Typhoon

Wind directions and wind speeds

Weather map showing wind directions and wind speeds (example)

Legend (precipitation radar and storms)

X Display the menu on the weather map

(Y page 200).

X Select Layers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Legend and pressW to confirm.

204 SIRIUS Weather W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

i The symbol for a tornadic storm is also valid for a cyclone (mesocyclone).

Precipitation type Color scale

Rain Seven color levels

from light (light

green) to heavy (red)

Mixed Light (light violet) to

heavy (violet)

Snow Light (light

turquoise) to heavy

(turquoise)

Time stamp

The time stamp showswhen theweather data

was created by the weather station.

X Display the menu on the weather map

(Y page 200).

X Select Layers by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Time stamp and pressW to confirm.

The time stamps correspond to the time at

the vehicle's current position. The change

over from summer time to standard time is

performed automatically.

Changing to the information chart

X Display the menu on the weather map

(Y page 200).

X Select Display Weather and pressW to confirm.

SIRIUS Weather 205

W e a t h e r s e r v ic e s

206

COMAND features ............................. 208

General information ......................... 208

Basic functions ................................. 213

System settings ................................ 215

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode ........ 216

Video DVD mode ............................... 221

Operation with an active COMAND

source ................................................ 225

AUX mode .......................................... 228

207

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

COMAND features

These Operating Instructions describe all

standard and optional equipment available

for your COMAND system at the time of

purchase. Country-specific deviations are

possible. Please note that your COMAND

system may not be equipped with all the

features described.

General information

Important safety notes

G WARNING

The RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser

product. There is a danger of invisible laser

radiationwhen you open or damage the cover.

Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVD

player does not contain any parts which can

be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,

have any necessary service work performed

by qualified personnel.

G WARNING

The driver should not wear a Rear Seat

Entertainment headset while operating the

vehicle under any circumstances. The use of

a headset while driving the vehicle could

drastically impair the ability to react to audible

traffic conditions (e.g. emergency sirens from

police/fire/ambulance, another car's horn,

etc.).

G WARNING

When not in use, headsets or external video

sources should be stored in a safe location

(e.g. one of the vehicle's storage

compartments) so that they are not loose

within the passenger compartment during

braking, vehicle maneuvers or a traffic

accident. Objects moving within the

passenger compartment could cause serious

personal injury to vehicle occupants.

G WARNING

Due to a potential choking hazard, wired

headset usage by children should only occur

with adult supervision.

Components

Overview

The Rear Seat Entertainment System is

comprised of:

Rtwo rear-compartment screens behind the

front-seat head restraints

Rthe remote control

Ra CD/DVD drive

RAUX jacks on both screens (AUX display)

and on the CD/DVD drive (AUX drive)

Rtwo sets of cordless headphones

208 General information R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Rear-compartment screens

: AUX jacks, detailed view in the "CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks" section (Y page 210)

; Display

Remote control

Overview

i Two remote controls are included in the scope of supply for the USA and Canada.

: Switches the screen on/off

; Switches the button lighting on/off

= Selects the screen for the remote control

? Selects a menu or menu item

General information 209

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

A Confirms a selection or setting

B Switches sound on/off (for corded

headphones)

C Adjusts the volume (for corded

headphones)

D Skips to a track, fast-forward/fast-rewind

E Selects a track; direct entry

F Exits a menu (back)

Selecting the screen for the remote

control

You can use the remote control to operate

one of the two rear screens at a time. To do

so, you must switch the remote control to the

desired screen.

X To select the left-hand screen: turn

thumbwheel= until "L REAR" is

highlighted in the window.

X To select the right-hand screen: turn

thumbwheel= until "REAR R" is

highlighted in the window.

Switching the screen on/off

If the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 in the

ignition lock (see the vehicle Operator's

Manual), or the SmartKey is not inserted, the

screens in the rear will switch off after 30

minutes. Before the screens switch off, they

show a message to this effect.

You can switch the screens back on.

However, this will discharge the starter

battery.

X Point the remote control at the rear-

compartment screen which has been

selected for remote operation.

X Press button: on the remote control.

The respective rear screen switches on or

off.

i You can only switch the screens on using the remote control if the ignition is

switched on.

Switching the button lighting on/off

X Press button; on the remote control.

Depending on the previous status, the

button lighting is switched on or off.

i If you do not use the remote control for about 15 seconds, the button lighting

switches off automatically.

Switching the sound on/off (corded

headphones only)

X Press buttonB on the remote control.

The sound is switched on/off.

Selecting a menu/menu item and

confirming your selection

X Select a menu/menu item using the

=;9: buttons on the

remote control and press the9 button to confirm.

CD/DVD drive and AUX jacks

: CD/DVD slot

; AUX, right-hand (R) jack for audio signal

(red)

= AUX, left-hand (L) jack for audio signal

(white)

? AUX, video (V) jack (yellow)

A CD/DVD eject button

The AUX jacks shown are for the AUX drive.

Identical jacks can be found on the right-hand

side of the rear-compartment screens (AUX

display), (Y page 209).

210 General information R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Cordless headphones

Overview

: Volume control

; Selects a screen for the headphones

= Battery compartment cover

? Switches the cordless headphones on/off

A Indicator lamp with various displays (Y page 211)

X Open both sides of the headphones and adjust the fit of the headphones by pulling the

headphone band in the direction of the arrow.

Switching the cordless headphones

on/off

X Press button?.

Depending on the previous status, the

headphones are switched on or off. To save

the battery, the headphones are switched

off automatically if they do not receive an

audio signal within three minutes.

Adjusting the volume of the

headphones

X Turn volume control: until the desired

volume has been set.

i If you have connected corded headphones to a rear-compartment

screen, you can adjust the volume by

pressing buttonsC on the remote control

(Y page 209).

Selecting a screen for the headphones

X Move push slider; to L (left-hand screen)

or R (right-hand screen).

Indicator lamp displays

The color of the indicator lamp shows

whether the headphones are switched on or

off and indicates the charge level of the

batteries inserted.

General information 211

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

LED

display

Status

Green The batteries are fine.

Red The batteries are almost

discharged.

Lit

continuous

ly

The headphones are switched

on and connected to a screen.

Flashing The headphones are

searching for the connection

to a screen.

No display

(dark)

The headphones are switched

off or the batteries are

discharged.

Connecting additional headphones

You can connect one additional set of corded

headphones to each of the two rear screens

(Y page 209). The socket is designed for

headphones with a 3.5 mm stereo jack plug

and an impedance of 32 ohms.

Changing batteries

Notes

Batteries are required for the remote control

and for the two sets of cordless headphones.

G WARNING

Keep the batteries out of the reach of

children. Consult a doctor immediately if a

child should swallow a battery.

Do not dismantle, short-circuit or burn a

battery.

H Environmental note

Dispose of discharged batteries in an

environmentally responsible manner.

On the remote control

: Battery compartment

; Catch tab

= Battery compartment cover

? Retaining lugs

A Batteries

The remote control contains 2 type AAA,

1.5 V batteries.

X To open the battery compartment:

remove battery compartment cover= on

the back of the remote control.

X To do so, press down catch tab; and

remove battery compartment cover=.

X Remove discharged batteriesA from the

tray.

212 General information R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the

polarity markings on the batteries and

battery compartment when doing so.

Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)

must face upwards.

Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)

must face downwards.

X To close the battery compartment:

insert battery compartment cover=

starting with retaining lugs? into the

battery compartment and allow catch

tab; to engage in place.

On the cordless headphones

The battery compartment cover is located on

the left headphone.

: Battery compartment cover

The cordless headphones contain 2 type AAA,

1.5 V batteries.

X To open the battery compartment: flip

battery compartment cover: upwards.

As you do so, hold the left-hand side of the

headphones as shown to prevent the

batteries from falling out.

X Remove the discharged batteries from the

tray.

X Insert the new batteries. Observe the

polarity markings on the batteries and

battery compartment when doing so.

Left-hand battery: the positive pole (+)

must face upwards.

Right-hand battery: the positive pole (+)

must face downwards.

X To close the battery compartment:

press battery compartment cover

downwards until it engages into place.

If the batteries have been inserted

correctly, the indicator lamp will light up

green when the headphones are switched

on.

Basic functions

Using headphones

You can use the cordless headphones

supplied and/or up to two sets of corded

headphones connected to the corresponding

jack of the rear-compartment screens

(Y page 209).

Information on:

Rswitching the cordless headphones on/off

Radjusting the volume of the headphones

Rselecting a screen for the headphones

can be found in the Cordless headphones

section (Y page 211).

Using the main loudspeakers

This function is available in conjunction with

COMAND.

You can use the vehicle loudspeakers to

listen to a disc inserted in the rear-

compartment drive. To do so, at least one of

the rear-compartment screensmust be set to

disc mode.

X To set using COMAND: press, for

example, the$ function button to

switch on an audio mode.

X Select Audio by sliding ZV the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. The Audio menu appears.

X Select Rear Audio by turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

Basic functions 213

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

i The headphones' volume setting does not affect the main loudspeakers.

Adjusting the sound settings

You can select the sound settings in the audio

CD/DVD/MP3, video DVD and AUX modes.

X Switch on an operating mode (e.g. audio

CD mode) (Y page 217).

X Select Treble or Bass using

the:=; buttons on the remote

control and press the9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

Multiple users

Simultaneous use of the rear-

compartment disc drive

The two rear-compartment screens can be

operated almost entirely independently from

one another. However, there can be a conflict

in some menus if the two screens are used

simultaneously.

If the rear-compartment disc drive is being

used for both screens simultaneously,

selecting certain menus or settings on one of

the screens also affects the other screen.

The following functions affect both screens:

Rchanging playback options

Rselecting a track (from a track list or folder)

Rusing the play, pause and stop functions

Rfast forwarding/rewinding or scrolling

Rcalling up the DVD menu and navigating

within it

Rsetting the language, subtitles and camera

angle

Rcalling up interactive DVD content

The following functions affect only one

screen:

Raudio and video functions as well as picture

settings

Rswitching between full screen and the

menu

Switching between operating modes

When you exit an operating mode (e.g. audio

CD mode), the current setting is saved. If you

call up this operating mode again later, there

are two possibilities:

Rthe operating mode has been changed on

the other screen.

Rthe operating mode has not been changed.

In the first case, the operating mode appears

as it is on the other screen.

In the second case, the setting appears on the

screen as it was when you last exited the

operating mode.

Picture settings

Overview

You can select these settings in video DVD

and AUX mode. Instructions for AUX mode

are detailed later (Y page 228).

Adjusting the brightness, contrast and

color

X Switch on video DVD mode (Y page 221).

X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or

X Select (Y page 188)Menu while the

navigation menu is shown and press the

9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD-Video using

the:=; buttons and press the

9 button to confirm.

214 Basic functions R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Example: TV mode

: Brightness, contrast and color

; Picture formats

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color

using the9: buttons and press the

9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

Changing the picture format

X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or

X Select (Y page 188)Menu while the

navigation menu is shown and press the

9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD-Video using

the:=; buttons and press the

9 button to confirm. The dot in front of one of the menu items

16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen

indicates the format currently selected.

X Select a format using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

System settings

Note

You can adjust almost all system settings

individually for each screen without affecting

the other screen. You make these settings

using the remote control (Y page 209).

Selecting the display language

X Select System using the9=; button on the remote control and press

9 to confirm. You see the system menu on the selected

rear screen.

X Select Settings with the: button and

press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The list of languages appears. The# dot indicates the current setting.

X Select a language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The Rear Seat Entertainment System

activates the selected language.

Switching the display design

X Select Settings with the: button and

press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Day Mode, Night Mode or

Automatic using the9: buttons

and press the9 button to confirm. The dot indicates the current setting.

Design Explanation

Day Mode The display is set

permanently to day

design.

Night Mode The display is set

permanently to night

design.

Automatic The display design

changes depending on

the vehicle instrument

cluster illumination.

System settings 215

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

Setting the brightness

X Select Settings with the: button and

press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. A scale appears.

X Adjust the brightness using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm. The brightness bar moves up or down. The

picture becomes lighter or darker in

accordance with the scale.

Showing/hiding the picture

X To hide the picture: select Display Off

in the system menu using the:; buttons on the remote control and press

the9 button to confirm. The picture is hidden.

X To display the picture: press the9 button.

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode

Safety note

G WARNING

The RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser

product. There is a danger of invisible laser

radiationwhen you open or damage the cover.

Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVD

player does not contain any parts which can

be serviced by the user. For safety reasons,

have any necessary service work performed

by qualified personnel.

General information

You will find information on the following

topics in the Audio section:

Rnotes on CDs/DVDs (Y page 165)

Rnotes on MP3 mode (Y page 164)

Rnotes on copyright (Y page 165)

Inserting a CD/DVD

Depending on the model and the vehicle

equipment, the CD/DVD drive is located:

Rbehind the center console in a folding

compartment, or

Rin the center under the rear seats, or

Rin the armrest between the rear seats

: Disc slot

; Disc eject button

The CD/DVD drive is a single disc drive. If

there is already a disc inserted, this must be

ejected before another is inserted.

X Insert a disc into the disc slot.

The printed side of the disc must face

upwards. If neither side of the disc is

printed, the side you wish to play must face

downwards.

The CD/DVD drive draws in the disc.

216 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

The CD/DVD drive plays the disc:

Rif it has been inserted correctly and is a

permissible disc, and

Rafter you have switched on disc mode

(audio CD/audio DVD/MP3 mode)

(Y page 217).

Data on an MP3 CD first needs to be loaded

by the drive. Loading may take some time,

depending on the number of folders and

tracks.

Removing a CD/DVD

X Press the button.

The drive ejects the disc.

X Take the disc out of the slot.

If you do not take the disc out of the slot,

the drive will draw it in again automatically

after a short while.

Switching to audio CD, audio DVD or

MP3 mode

X Insert a CD/DVD (Y page 216).

The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads

the inserted disc.

X Select Disc in the menu using the

9=; buttons on the remote

control and confirm by pressing the9 button.

The corresponding mode is switched on.

The Rear Seat Entertainment System plays

the disc.

Example: audio CD mode

: Type of data medium_

; Track number

= Track name (only if stored on the disc as

CD text)

? Track time

A Graphic time and track display

B Current playback settings (no symbol for

"Normal track sequence")

C To set the bass

D To set the treble

E Disc name (if stored on the disc as CD

text)

F To call up the track list

G Playback options

Example: audio DVD mode

: Type of data medium

; Track number

= Track name (if stored on the disc)

? Track time

A Graphic time and track display

B Current playback settings (no symbol for

"Normal track sequence")

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 217

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

C To set the bass

D To set the treble

E Disc name (if stored on the disc)

F To call up the track list

G Stop function

H Pause function

I Playback options

Example: MP3 mode

: Type of data medium

; Track number

= Track name

? Track time

A Graphic time and track display

B Current playback settings (no symbol for

"Normal track sequence")

C To set the bass

D To set the treble

E Disc name or current folder

F To call up the folder list

G Playback options; to switch track

information on/off

i Variable bit rates in MP3 tracks can result in the elapsed time shown being different

from the actual elapsed time.

Selecting a track

Selecting by skipping to a track

X To skip forwards or backwards to a

track: press the= or; button on

the remote control.

or

X Press theE orF button.

The skip forward function skips to the next

track.

Skipping backwards restarts the current

track (if it has been playing for more than

eight seconds) or starts the previous track

(if the current track has only been playing

for a shorter time).

If you have selected the playback options

Random Tracks or Random Folder, the

track order is random.

Selecting by track list

In audio CD mode, the track list contains all

tracks on the disc currently playing.

In audio DVD mode, the track list contains all

tracks in the currently active group; see

"Setting the audio format" (Y page 163).

In MP3 mode, the track list shows all tracks

in the currently active folder as well as the

folder structure, allowing you to select any

track on the MP3 CD.

X Select Tracks (audio CD/DVD mode) or

Folder (MP3 mode) using

the:=; buttons on the remote

control, and confirm by pressing the9 button.

or

X Press the9 button when the display/ selection window is selected.

The track list appears. The# dot indicates the current track.

X Select a track using the9: buttons

and press the9 button to confirm.

218 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Making a selectionby entering the track

number directly

X Press theh button on the remote

control.

The track entry display appears.

Example: track 2

X Press number button 2.

Example: track 12

X Press the corresponding number keys in

rapid succession.

i It is not possible to enter numbers that exceed the number of tracks on the CD or

in the currently active folder.

X Wait for approximately three seconds after

making the entry.

You will hear the track which has been

entered. The corresponding basic menu

then reappears.

Fast forwarding/rewinding

X With the display/selection window active,

press the= or; button on the

remote control repeatedly until you reach

the desired position.

or

X Press and hold theE orF button

until the desired position is reached.

Selecting a folder

This function is only available in MP3 mode.

X Select Folder in MP3 mode using

the:=; buttons on the remote

controller and press the9 button to confirm.

or

X Press the9 button when the display/ selection window is selected.

The folder content appears.

: Folder selection symbol

; Current folder name

= Track symbol

X To switch to the superordinate folder:

select icon: using the9: buttons

on the remote control and press the9 button to confirm.

The display shows the next folder up.

: Folder selection symbol

; Folder icon

X Select a folder using the9: buttons

and press the9 button to confirm. You will see the tracks in the folder.

X Select a track using the9: buttons

and press the9 button to confirm. The track is played and the corresponding

folder is now the active folder.

Pause function

This function is only available in audio DVD

mode.

Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode 219

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

X To pause playback: select using

the:=; buttons on the remote

control and press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

Stop function

This function is only available in audio DVD

mode.

X To interrupt playback: select using

the:=; buttons on the remote

control and press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it

was interrupted.

X To stop playback: while playback is

interrupted, select again and press

the9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the

beginning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the

DVD.

Setting the audio format

Further information on audio formats is

available in the "Audio" section

(Y page 163).

X Select DVD-A using the:=; buttons on the remote controller and press

9 to confirm.

X Select Group using the9: buttons

and press the9 button to confirm. The list of available audio formats appears.

The# dot indicates the format currently selected.

X Select an audio format using the

9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Playback options

Further information on playback options is

available in the "Audio" section

(Y page 163).

X Select CD, DVD-A or MP3 using

the:=; buttons on the remote

control and press the9 button to confirm. The options list appears. The# dot indicates the option currently selected.

X Select Normal Track Sequence, Random

Tracks or Random Folder using the

9: buttons and press the9 button to confirm.

The option is switched on. For all options

except Normal Track Sequence, you will

see a corresponding display in the display/

selection window.

i If you change the disc, the Normal Track Sequence option is activated

automatically. If an option is selected, it

remains selected after the Rear Seat

Entertainment System is switched on or

off.

Switching track information on/off

(MP3 mode only)

If the function is switched on, folder and track

names are displayed.

If the function is switched off, disc and file

names are displayed.

X Select MP3 using the:=; buttons on the remote controller and press

the9 button to confirm.

220 Audio CD/DVD and MP3 mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

X Select Display Track Information

using the9: buttons and press the

9 button to confirm. The function is switched onO or off, depending on the previous status.

Video DVD mode

General information

Here you will find further information on the

following topics:

Rsafety notes (Y page 154)

Rnotes on DVDs (Y page 186)

DVD playback conditions

Playback problems may occur when playing

copied discs. There is a large variety of discs,

DVD authoring software, writing software and

writers available. This variety means that

there is no guarantee that the Rear Seat

Entertainment System will be able to play

video DVDs that you have copied yourself.

You will find further information in the Video

section (Y page 187). Information regarding

COMAND also applies to the Rear Seat

Entertainment System.

Function restrictions

Depending on the DVD, it is possible that

certain functions or actions described in this

sectionwill be temporarily blocked ormay not

function at all. As soon as you try to activate

these functions or actions, you will see the

K symbol in the display.

Inserting and removing a CD/DVD

X Proceed as described in the "Audio CD/

DVD and MP3 mode" section

(Y page 216).

Switching to video DVD mode

X Insert a video DVD.

The Rear Seat Entertainment System loads

the disc.

If disc mode was the last mode selected, it

will now be active.

If it was not, switch on video DVD mode as

described in the following instruction.

X Select Disc in the menu using the

9=; buttons on the remote

control and confirm by pressing the9 button.

If the video DVD fulfills the playback

criteria, the film either starts automatically

or the menu saved on the DVD appears. If

the DVD menu appears, you must start the

film manually.

X Select the corresponding menu item in the

DVD menu.

Hiding/showing the navigation menu

X To show: press the9 or: button

on the remote control.

X To hide: press the9 or: button.

or

X Wait for approximately eight seconds.

Navigation menu

: Disc type

; Current title

= Current scene

Video DVD mode 221

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

? Track time

A To show the menu

Showing/hiding the menu

X To show: press the9 button on the remote control.

or

X Select Menu while the navigation menu is

shown and press the9 button to confirm.

X To hide: press the9 button, select

Full Screen and press the9 button to confirm.

Menu system

: Video DVD options

; Pause function

= Stop function

? To set the treble

A To set the bass

Fast forwarding/rewinding

X Press and hold theE orF button on

the remote control until the desired

position has been reached.

You see the navigation menu.

Pause function

X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or

X Select Menu while the navigation menu is

shown and press the9 button to confirm.

X To pause playback: select and press

the9 button to confirm. The display changes to.

X To continue playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. The menu is hidden.

Stop function

X To show the menu: press the9 button on the remote control.

or

X Select Menu while the navigation menu is

shown and press the9 button to confirm.

X To interrupt playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. The display changes to. The

video image is hidden.

X To continue playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. Playback continues from the point where it

was interrupted. The menu is hidden.

X To stop playback: while playback is

interrupted, select again and press

the9 button to confirm. Playback stops and returns to the

beginning of the DVD. is highlighted.

X To restart playback: select and

press the9 button to confirm. Playback starts from the beginning of the

DVD.

222 Video DVD mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Selecting a scene/chapter

Note

Further information on this function is

available in the "Video" section

(Y page 189).

Skipping forwards/backwards

X Press the= or; button on the

remote control.

or

X Press theE orF button.

The navigation menu (Y page 188) appears

for approximately eight seconds.

Selecting a scene/chapter directly

The examples illustrate how to select scene/

chapter 5.

X Option 1: while the film is playing, press

theh button on the remote control.

X Press the corresponding number key, such

as 5.

X Option 2: while the film is playing, press

the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Scene Selection and press the

9 button to confirm.

X Select 5 using the9 or: button and

press the9 button to confirm. In both cases, playback will begin from the

fifth scene/chapter after a brief pause.

Selecting a film/title

Note

Further information on this function is

available in the "Video" section

(Y page 189).

Option 1

X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Title Selection and press the

9 button to confirm.

X To call up the selection list: press the

9 button.

X Select a film/track.

Option 2

Example: selecting film 2

X Press button 2.

After a brief pause, the second film is

played.

DVD menu

Note

You will find further information on the DVD

menu in the "Video" section (Y page 190).

Calling up the DVD menu

X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select Video-DVD and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

Video DVD mode 223

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Menu and press the9 button to confirm.

The DVD menu appears.

Selecting menu items in the DVD menu

X Select a menu item using the

9:=; buttons on the

remote control and press the9 button to confirm.

A menu appears.

i Menu items which cannot be selected are shown in gray.

X Confirm Select by pressing the9 button. The Rear Seat Entertainment System

carries out the action or shows a submenu.

X If available, additional options can now be

selected.

The Rear Seat Entertainment System then

switches back to the DVD menu.

i Depending on the DVD, the menu items: Back (to movie), Play,

Stop,.,/ or Go Upmay either not

function at all ormay not function at certain

points in the DVD menu. To indicate this,

theK icon appears in the display.

Stopping a film or skipping to the

beginning or end of a scene

X Select any menu item from the DVD menu.

The menu appears.

X To stop the film: select the Stop menu

item and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X To skip to the end of a scene: select

the/ menu item and press the9 button to confirm.

X To skip to the beginning of a scene:

select the. menu item and press the

9 button to confirm.

Moving up one level in the DVD menu

X Option 1: press the% back button on

the remote control or select the

corresponding menu item in the DVD

menu.

X Option 2: select any menu item in the DVD

menu.

X Select the Go Up menu item in the menu

and press the9 button to confirm.

Back to the film

X Option 1: press the% back button on

the remote control repeatedly until you see

the film, or select the corresponding menu

item in the DVD menu.

X Option 2: select any menu item in the DVD

menu and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select the Back (to movie)menu item in

the menu and press the9 button to confirm.

Setting the audio format

This function is not available on all DVDs. If it

is available, you can set the audio language

or the audio format. The number of settings

is determined by the DVD content. It may also

224 Video DVD mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

be possible to access the settings from the

DVD menu.

X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Audio Language and press the9 button to confirm.

A menu appears after a short while. The

# dot in front of an entry indicates the currently selected language.

X Select a language using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Subtitles and camera angle

These functions are not available on all DVDs.

The number of subtitle languages and camera

angles available depends on the content of

the DVD. It may also be possible to access

the settings from the DVD menu.

X Press the9 button on the remote control and show the menu.

X Select DVD-Video and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

X Select DVD Functions and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Subtitles or Camera Angle and

press the9 button to confirm. In both cases, a menu appears after a few

seconds. The# dot in front of an entry indicates the current setting.

X Select a setting using the9: buttons and press the9button to confirm.

X To exit the menu: press the= or; button.

Interactive content

DVDs can also contain interactive content

(e.g. a video game). In a video game, you may

be able to influence events by selecting and

triggering actions. The type and number of

actions depend on the DVD.

X Select an action using the

9;:= buttons on the

remote control and press the9 button to execute it.

A menu appears and the first entry,

Select, is highlighted.

X Press the9 button.

Operation with an active COMAND

source

Switching the function on/off in

COMAND

You can transfer an audio or video source

selected in COMAND to the Rear Seat

Entertainment System.

i If you then switchmodes in COMAND, the new source will not be transmitted to the

Rear Seat Entertainment System.

X To switch on the function in COMAND:

switch on the desired audio mode in

COMAND, e.g. CD mode (Y page 157), or

show the menu in video DVD mode

(Y page 188).

X Select the menu item at the bottom left,

e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm. A menu appears.

Operation with an active COMAND source 225

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

X Select Active Aud./Vid. Source For

Rear and pressW to confirm.

In the status bar at the top, you will see the

headphones icon and the_ icon for the

source that has been switched on.

X To switch off the function in COMAND:

switch on the desired audio mode in

COMAND or show the menu in video DVD

mode.

X Select the menu item at the bottom left,

e.g. CD in audio CD mode, by slidingV and turning cVd the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.

X Select Rear Audio/Video Off_ and

pressW the COMAND controller to confirm.

Selecting an active COMAND source

in the rear-compartment screen

Loading the active COMAND source

X Select COMAND using the9=; buttons on the remote control and press

9 to confirm. The audio or video source selected in

COMAND is loaded in the Rear Seat

Entertainment System.

When the loading process is complete, the

audio or video source is set in the Rear Seat

Entertainment System.

If Rear Audio/Video Off is activated in

COMAND, the COMAND is off or there

is no active COMAND source message

appears.

Audio CD mode

Example: CD mode

226 Operation with an active COMAND source R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

X To select a track by skipping to a

track: press the= or; button on

the remote control.

or

X Press theE orF button.

The skip forward function skips to the next

track.

Skipping backwards restarts the current

track (if it has been playing for more than

eight seconds) or starts the previous track

(if the current track has only been playing

for a shorter time).

Additional setting option:

Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)

Audio DVD mode

Example: audio DVD mode

X To skip to the next/previous group:

press the: button on the remote

control.

X Highlight with the= or; orb or

c button and press9 to confirm.

i Information on groups can be found in the "Setting the audio format" section

(Y page 163).

Additional setting option:

Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)

MP3 mode

Example: MP3 mode

X To select a track by skipping to a

track: press the= or; button on

the remote control.

or

X Press theE orF button.

The skip forward function skips to the next

track.

Skipping backwards restarts the current

track (if it has been playing for more than

eight seconds) or starts the previous track

(if the current track has only been playing

for a shorter time).

X To select a folder: press the: button

on the remote control.

X Highlight one of the two folder symbols

with the= or; button and press

9 to confirm. Depending on your selection, the previous

or next folder is selected and the first track

is played.

Additional setting option:

Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)

Operation with an active COMAND source 227

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

Video DVD mode

Example: video DVD mode

X To hide a menu: confirm Menu with the

9 button. The video image is played in full screen

mode.

Additional setting options:

Rsetting the brightness, contrast and color

(Y page 214)

Rchanging the picture format (Y page 215)

Rselecting the sound settings (Y page 214)

AUX mode

Introduction

You can connect one external video source to

each of the displays of the Rear Seat

Entertainment System (AUX display) and also

one external video source to the rear-

compartment CD/DVD drive (AUX drive) with

a sound and video signal.

Please see the corresponding operating

instructions for information on how to

operate the external video source.

For further details about external video

sources, please consult an authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center.

Connecting AUX equipment

AUX drive

The AUX drive jacks are located on the CD/

DVD drive next to the CD/DVD eject button

(Y page 210).

Displaying AUX

The AUX display jacks are on the side of the

screen (Y page 209).

Audio and video connection

X Insert the audio plugs for the left and right

signals into the corresponding L and R

jacks.

X Insert the video plug into the V jack.

Activating AUX mode

AUX drive

X Select Aux in the menu using the

9=; buttons on the remote

control and press the9 button to confirm. The AUX menu appears.

AUX menu

X Select Source from the AUX menu and

press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Disk Drive Aux and press the9 button to confirm.

You will hear and see the content of the

external video source if it is connected to

the CD/DVD drive and switched to

228 AUX mode R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

playback. If no video image is available

from the AUX source connected, you will

see an audio menu.

Displaying AUX

X Select the screen by turning the scroll

wheel on remote control (Y page 210) until

"L REAR " (left screen) or "REAR R" (right

screen) is highlighted in the window.

X Select Aux in the menu using the

9=; buttons on the remote

control and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Source from the AUX menu and

press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Display Aux and press the9 button to confirm.

You will see and hear the content of the

video source if it is switched to playback. If

no video image is available from the AUX

source connected, you will see an audio

menu.

Adjusting treble and bass

X Select Treble or Bass in the AUX menu

and press the9 button on the remote control to confirm.

An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9 or: button and press the9 button to confirm.

Adjusting the brightness, contrast or

color

X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux

in the AUX menu and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select Brightness, Contrast or Color

and press the9 button to confirm. An adjustment scale appears.

X Select a setting using the9 or: button and press the9 button to confirm.

Changing the picture format

X Select Display Aux or Disc Drive Aux

in the AUX menu and press the9 button to confirm.

X Select 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or

Widescreen using the9: buttons

and press the9 button to confirm. The dot in front of a menu item indicates

the current setting.

AUX mode 229

R e a r S e a t E n t e r t a in m e n t S y s t e m

Z

230

231

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the E-Class Mercedes-Benz works, you can view and download the Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Operating Instructions for Mercedes-Benz E-Class as well as other Mercedes-Benz manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Operating Instructions should include all the details that are needed to use a Mercedes-Benz E-Class. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Mercedes-Benz E-Class v2 2012 Operating Instructions as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.